Philips 55POS9002/12 User Manual Uporabniški Priročnik 55pos9002 12 Dfu Eng

User Manual 55pos9002_12_dfu_eng

User Manual: Philips 55POS9002/12 Uporabniški priročnik Izjemno tanek OLED-televizor 4K s sistemom Android 55POS9002/12 | Philips55POS9002/12

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 173 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Register your product and get support at POS9002 series
www.philips.com/welcome
User Manual
55POS9002
Contents
1 Setting Up 4
1.1 Read Safety 4
1.2 TV Stand and Wall Mounting 4
1.3 Tips on Placement 4
1.4 Power Cable 4
1.5 Antenna Cable 4
2 Remote Control 6
2.1 Key overview 6
2.2 Pair Your Remote Control to TV 7
2.3 Voice search 7
2.4 IR Sensor 7
2.5 Batteries 8
2.6 Cleaning 8
3 Switching On and Off 9
3.1 On or standby 9
3.2 Keys on TV 9
4 Channels 10
4.1 Install Channels 10
4.2 Channel Lists 10
4.3 Watching channels 11
4.4 Favourite Channels 13
4.5 Text / Teletext 14
5 Channel Installation 16
5.1 Satellite Installation 16
5.2 Antenna/Cable Installation 19
5.3 Channel List Copy 21
5.4 Satellite List Copy 22
6 Connect Devices 24
6.1 About Connections 24
6.2 CAM with Smart Card - CI+ 25
6.3 Home Theatre System - HTS 25
6.4 Smartphones and Tablets 26
6.5 Blu-ray Disc Player 26
6.6 DVD Player 26
6.7 Bluetooth 27
6.8 Headphones 27
6.9 Game Console 28
6.10 USB Hard Drive 28
6.11 USB Keyboard 29
6.12 USB Flash Drive 29
6.13 Photo Camera 30
6.14 Camcorder 30
6.15 Computer 30
7 Connect your Android TV 32
7.1 Network and Internet 32
7.2 Google Account 33
8 Apps 35
8.1 About Apps 35
8.2 Google Play 35
8.3 App Gallery 36
8.4 Start or Stop an App 36
8.5 Lock Apps 36
8.6 Manage Apps 38
8.7 Storage 38
9 Internet 39
9.1 Start Internet 39
9.2 Options on Internet 39
10 TV Menu 40
10.1 About TV Menu 40
10.2 Open TV Menu 40
11 Sources 41
11.1 Switch to a device 41
11.2 Options for a TV Input 41
11.3 Device Name and Type 41
11.4 Rescan Connections 41
12 Networks 43
12.1 Network 43
12.2 Bluetooth 43
13 Settings 44
13.1 Picture 44
13.2 Sound 48
13.3 Ambilight Settings 49
13.4 Eco Settings 51
13.5 General Settings 51
13.6 Clock, Region, and Language Settings 53
13.7 Android Settings 54
13.8 Universal Access Settings 54
13.9 Lock Settings 54
14 Videos, Photos and Music 56
14.1 From a Computer or NAS 56
14.2 Favourites Menu 56
14.3 Most Popular Menu and Last Played Menu 56
14.4 From a USB Connection 56
14.5 Play your Videos 56
14.6 View your Photos 57
14.7 Play your Music 58
15 TV Guide 60
15.1 What You Need 60
15.2 TV Guide Data 60
15.3 Using the TV Guide 60
16 Recording and Pause TV 62
16.1 Recording 62
16.2 Pause TV 63
17 Smartphones and Tablets 65
17.1 Philips TV Remote App 65
17.2 Google Cast 65
17.3 AirPlay 65
17.4 MHL 65
18 Top Picks 66
18.1 About Top Picks 66
18.2 Now on TV 66
18.3 TV on Demand 66
18.4 Video on Demand 67
19 Home Menu 68
19.1 Open the Home Menu 68
19.2 Restricted Profile 68
20 Netflix 69
21 Software 70
21.1 Update Software 70
21.2 Software Version 70
21.3 Automatic Software Update 70
21.4 Open Source Software 70
21.5 Open Source License 71
22 Specifications 159
2
22.1 Environmental 159
22.2 Power 159
22.3 Operating System 159
22.4 Reception 159
22.5 Display Type 160
22.6 Display Input Resolution 160
22.7 Connectivity 160
22.8 Sound 160
22.9 Multimedia 160
23 Help and Support 162
23.1 Register your TV 162
23.2 Using Help 162
23.3 Troubleshooting 162
23.4 Online Help 163
23.5 Support and Repair 164
24 Safety and Care 165
24.1 Safety 165
24.2 Screen Care 166
25 Terms of Use 167
25.1 Terms of Use - TV 167
25.2 Terms of Use - Smart TV 167
26 Copyrights 168
26.1 MHL 168
26.2 Ultra HD 168
26.3 HDMI 168
26.4 Dolby Audio 168
26.5 DTS Premium Sound ™ 168
26.6 Wi-Fi Alliance 168
26.7 Kensington 168
26.8 Other Trademarks 169
27 Disclaimer regarding services and/or
software offered by third parties 170
Index 171
3
1
Setting Up
1.1
Read Safety
Read the safety instructions first before you use the
TV.
To read the instructions, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Safety Instructions.
1.2
TV Stand and Wall Mounting
TV Stand
You can find the instructions for mounting the TV
stand in the Quick Start Guide that came with the TV.
In case you lost this guide, you can download it
from www.philips.com.
Use the product type number of the TV to look for
the Quick Start Guide to download.
Wall Mounting
Your TV is also prepared for a VESA-compliant wall
mount bracket (sold separately).
Use the following VESA code when purchasing the
wall mount . . .
• 55POS9002
VESA MIS-F 300x300, M6
Preparation
First remove the 4 plastic screw caps out of the
threaded bushes on the back of the TV.
Make sure that the metal screws, to mount the TV to
the VESA-compliant bracket, go about 10mm deep
inside the threaded bushes of the TV.
Caution
Wall mounting the TV requires special skills and
should only be performed by qualified personnel. The
TV wall mounting should meet safety standards
according to the TVs weight. Also read the safety
precautions before positioning the TV.
TP Vision Europe B.V. bears no responsibility for
improper mounting or any mounting that results in
accident or injury.
1.3
Tips on Placement
• Position the TV where light does not shine directly
on the screen.
• Dim lighting conditions in the room for best
Ambilight effect.
• Position the TV up to 15 cm away from the wall.
• The ideal distance to watch TV is 3 times its diagonal
screen size. When seated, your eyes should be level
with the centre of the screen.
1.4
Power Cable
• Insert the power cable into the POWER connector
on the back of the TV.
• Make sure the power cable is securely inserted in
the connector.
• Make sure that the power plug, in the wall socket, is
accessible at all times.
• When you unplug the power cable, always pull the
plug, never pull the cable.
Although this TV has a very low standby power
consumption, unplug the power cable to save energy
if you do not use the TV for a long period of time.
For more information, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Switching On for
more information on switching the TV on or off.
1.5
Antenna Cable
Insert the antenna plug firmly into
the Antenna socket at the back of the TV.
You can connect your own antenna or an antenna
signal from an antenna distribution system. Use an
IEC Coax 75 Ohm RF antenna connector.
4
Use this antenna connection for DVB-T and DVB-C
input signals.
5
2
Remote Control
2.1
Key overview
Top
1 - Standby / On
To switch the TV on or back to Standby.
2 - VOICE microphone
3 - LIST
To open or close the channel list.
4 - AMBILIGHT
To select one of the Ambilight style.
5 - TV GUIDE
To open or close the TV Guide.
6 - SETTINGS
• To open the quick settings menu.
• To pair the remote control to the TV.
7 - TOP PICKS
To open the menu with recommended programmes,
Video on Demand (Rental Videos) or Online TV
(Catch Up TV).
If available.
8 - VOICE
To start speaking your voice search.
Middle
1 - TV Menu
To open the TV Menu with typical TV functions.
2 - SOURCES
To open or close the Sources menu.
3 - INFO
To open or close programme info.
4 - BACK
• To switch back to the previous channel you
selected.
• To return to previous menu.
5 - Colour keys
Direct selection of options.
6 - EXIT
To switch back to watching TV.
7 - OPTIONS
To open or close the options menu.
8 - OK key
To confirm a selection or setting.
9 - Arrow / navigation keys
To navigate up, down, left or right.
10 - HOME
To open the Home menu.
Bottom
6
1 -
To open the Netflix App directly.
2 - Volume
To adjust the volume level.
3 - Number keys
To select a channel directly.
4 - SUBTITLE
To switch Subtitles on, off or on during mute.
5 - Playback and Record
• Play , to playback.
• Pause , to pause playback
• Stop , to stop playback
• Rewind , to rewind
• Fast forward , to go fast forward
• Record , to start recording
6 - Channel
To switch to the next or previous channel in the
channel list.
To open the next or previous page in Text/Teletext.
7 - Mute
To mute the sound or to restore it.
8 - TEXT
To open or close Text/Teletext.
2.2
Pair Your Remote Control to
TV
This remote control uses both Bluetooth and IR
(infrared) to send its commands to the TV.
• You can use this remote control via IR (infrared) for
most operations.
• To use advanced operation like voice search and
remote control keyboard, you need to pair (link) the
TV with the remote control.
When you started the initial TV installation, the TV
invited you to long press the PAIR key, and by
doing so, the pairing was done.
Note: If the TV does not launch the voice search
field when press VOICE, pairing was
unsuccessful.
Pairing or pairing again
If the pairing with the remote control was lost, you
can pair the TV with the remote control again.
You can simply long press
the PAIR key (approximate for 3 seconds) for
pairing.
Alternatively, go (TV
menu) > Settings > Wireless and
network > Remote control > Pair remote control,
then follow the on-screen instructions.
A message appears when the pairing is successful.
Remote Control Software
(TV menu) > Settings > Wireless and
network > Remote control > Current software info
Once the remote control is paired, you can check the
current remote control software version.
(TV menu) > Settings > Wireless and
network > Remote control > Update remote
control software
Check available remote control software for updates.
2.3
Voice search
You can search for videos, music or anything else on
the Internet by simply using your voice. You can
speak into the microphone on the remote control.
You need to pair the remote control to the TV before
use voice search.
To use Voice...
1 - Press and hold VOICE on remote
control, the blue light on the remote control lights up
and the search field opens, the microphone is active.
2 - Speak out what you are looking for with clear
pronunciation. You can speak for 10 seconds before
the microphone switches off. It might take some time
for the results to appear.
3 - In the list of search results, you can select the
item you want.
Set the language you like to use with voice
interaction
(TV menu) > Settings > Android
settings > Preferences > Speech
7
2.4
IR Sensor
The TV can receive commands from a remote control
that uses IR (infrared) to send commands. If you use
such a remote control, always make sure you point
the remote control at the infrared sensor on the front
of the TV.
Warning
Do not put any objects in front of IR sensor of the TV,
it may block the IR signal.
2.5
Batteries
If the TV does not react on a key press on the remote
control, the batteries might be empty.
To replace the batteries, open the battery
compartment on the front-bottom of the remote
control.
1 - Use a small coin or other small, blunt object and
press the rectangular shaped release button to open
the battery lid.
2 - Replace the old batteries with 2
type AA-LR6-1.5V batteries. Make sure the + and
the - ends of the batteries line up correctly.
3 - Reposition the battery door and slide it back until
it clicks.
• Remove the batteries if you are not using the remote
control for a long time.
• Safely dispose of your old batteries according to the
end of use directions.
2.6
Cleaning
Your remote control is treated with a scratch-resistant
coating.
To clean the remote control, use a soft damp cloth.
Never use substances such as alcohol, chemicals or
household cleaners on the remote control.
8
3
Switching On and
Off
3.1
On or standby
Make sure the TV is connected to the mains AC
power. Connect the supplied power cord to the AC
in connector at the back of the TV. The indicator light
at the bottom of the TV lights up.
Switch on
Press on the remote control to switch the TV
on. Alternatively, press HOME. You can also
press the small joystick key on the back of the TV to
switch the TV on in case you can't find the remote
control or its batteries are empty.
Switch to standby
To switch the TV to standby, press on the remote
control. You can also press the small joystick key on
the back of the TV.
In standby mode, the TV is still connected to the
mains power but consumes very little energy.
To switch off the TV completely, disconnect the
power plug.
When disconnecting the power plug, always pull the
power plug, never the cord. Ensure that you have full
access to the power plug, power cord and outlet
socket at all times.
3.2
Keys on TV
If you lost the remote control or its batteries are
empty, you can still do some basic TV operations.
To open the basic menu…
1 - With the TV switched on, press the joystick key on
the back of the TV to bring up the basic menu.
2 - Press left or right to select Volume,
Channel or Sources. Select Demo, to start a
demo movie.
3 - Press up or down to adjust the volume or tune to
the next or previous channel. Press up or down to go
through the list of sources, including the tuner
selection. Press the joystick key to start the demo
movie.
4 - The menu will disappear automatically.
To switch the TV on standby, select and press the
joystick key.
9
4
Channels
4.1
Install Channels
For more information, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Channel, Antenna
Installation or Channel, Cable Installation.
4.2
Channel Lists
About Channel Lists
After a channel installation, all channels appear on
the channel list. Channels are shown with their name
and logo if this information is available.
With a channel list selected, press the
arrows (up) or (down) to select a channel,
then press OK to watch the selected channel. You
only tune to the channels in that list when
using   or   keys.
Channel icons
After an Automatic Channel Update of the channel
list, newly found channels are marked with
a (star).
If you lock a channel, it will be marked with
a (lock).
Radio stations
If digital broadcasting is available, digital radio
stations are installed during installation. Switch to a
radio channel just like you switch to a TV channel. A
Cable (DVB-C) channel installation usually places
radio stations from channel number 1001 onwards.
This TV can receive digital television standard DVB .
TV may not work properly with some operators of
digital television , non-compliance with requirements
of the standard in full.
Open a Channel List
Next to the list with all channels, you can select a
filtered list or you can select one of the favourite lists
you created.
To open the current channel list…
1 - Press , to switch to TV.
2 - Press OK to open the current channel list.
3 - Press BACK to close the channel list.
To select one of the channel lists…
1 - With a channel list open on screen,
press OPTIONS.
2 - Select Select Channel List and press OK.
3 - In the list menu, select one of the available
channel lists and press OK.
Alternatively, you can select the list name at the top
of the channel list and press OK to open the list
menu.
Filter a Channel List
You can filter a list with all channels. You can set the
channel list to show only TV channels or only Radio
stations. For Antenna/Cable channels you can set the
list to show the Free-to-Air or the Scrambled
channels.
To set a filter on a list with all channels…
1 - Press .
2 - Press OK to open the current channel list.
3 - Press OPTIONS.
4 - Select Select Channel List and press OK.
5 - Select Filter Antenna Channels or Filter Cable
Channels according to the list you want to filter, and
press OK.
6 - In the Options menu, select the filter you want
and press OK to activate. The name of the filter
appears as part of the channel list name on top of the
channel list.
7 - Press (left) to go back one step or press to
close the menu.
Search for a Channel
You can search for a channel to find it in a long list of
channels.
The TV can search for a channel within one of the 2
main channel lists - the Antenna or Cable channel list.
To search for a channel…
1 - Press .
2 - Press OK to open the current channel list.
3 - Press OPTIONS.
4 - Select Select Channel List and press OK.
5 - Select Filter Antenna Channels or Filter Cable
Channels and press OK.
6 - Select Search Channel and press OK to open
a text field.You can use the remote control keyboard
(if available) or the on-screen keyboard to enter text.
7 - Enter a number, a name or part of a name and
select Apply and press OK. The TV will search for
matching channel names in the list you selected.
Search results are listed as a channel list - see the list
name at the top. The search results disappear once
you select another channel list or close the list with
10
search results.
4.3
Watching channels
Tune to a Channel
To start watching TV channels, press . The TV
tunes to the channel you last watched.
Switch Channels
To switch channels, press or .
If you know the channel number, type in the number
with the number keys. Press OK after you entered
the number to switch immediately.
If the information is available from the Internet, the TV
shows the current programme name and details
followed by the next programme name and details.
Previous channel
To switch back to the previously tuned channel,
press BACK.
You can also tune to channels from a Channel List.
Lock a Channel
Lock and Unlock a Channel
To prevent children from watching a channel, you can
lock a channel. To watch a locked channel, you must
enter the 4 digit Child Lock PIN code first. You
cannot lock programmes from connected devices.
To lock a channel…
1 - Press .
2 - Press OK to open the channel list. If necessary
change the channel list.
3 - Select the channel you want to lock.
4 - Press OPTIONS and select Lock
Channel and press OK.
5 - Enter your 4 digit PIN code if the TV asks for it. A
locked channel is marked with a (lock).
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
To unlock a channel…
1 - Press .
2 - Press OK to open the channel list. If necessary
change the channel list.
3 - Select the channel you want to unlock.
4 - Press OPTIONS and select Unlock
Channel and press OK.
5 - Enter your 4 digit PIN code if the TV asks for it.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
If you lock or unlock channels in a channel list, you
only have to enter the PIN code just once until you
close the channel list.
For more information, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Child Lock for more
information.
Parental Rating
To prevent children from watching a programme not
suitable for their age, you can set an age rating.
Digital channels can have their programmes age
rated. When the age rating of a programme is equal to
or higher than the age you have set as age rating for
your child, the programme will be locked. To watch a
locked programme, you must enter the Parental
Rating code first.
To set an age rating…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Child Lock > Parental Rating and
press OK.
3 - Enter a 4-digit Child lock code. If you did not set
a code yet, select Set Code in Child Lock. Enter a
4-digit Child lock code and confirm. Now you can set
an age rating.
4 - Back in Parental Rating, select the age and
press OK.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
To switch off the parental age rating, select None.
However, in some countries you must set an age
rating.
For some broadcasters/operators, the TV only locks
programmes with a higher rating. The parental age
rating is set for all channels.
Channel Options
Open Options
While watching a channel, you can set some options.
Depending on the type of channel you are watching
(analogue or digital) or depending on the TV settings
you made, some options are available.
To open the options menu…
1 - While watching a channel, press OPTIONS.
2 - Press OPTIONS again to close.
11
Subtitles
Switch On
Digital broadcasts can have subtitles for their
programmes.
To show the subtitles…
Press SUBTITLE.
You can switch subtitles On or Off. Alternatively
you can select Automatic.
Automatic
If language information is part of the digital broadcast
and the broadcasted programme is not in your
language (the language set on TV), the TV can show
subtitles automatically in one of your preferred
subtitle languages. One of these subtitle languages
must also be part of the broadcast.
You can select your preferred subtitle languages
in Subtitle Language.
Subtitles from Text
If you tune to an analogue channel, you need to
make the subtitles available for each channel
manually.
1 - Switch to a channel and press TEXT to open
Text.
2 - Enter the page number for subtitles, usually 888.
3 - Press TEXT again, to close Text.
If you select On in the Subtitle menu when watching
this analogue channel, subtitles will be shown if
available.
To know if a channel is analogue or digital, switch to
the channel and open Information in OPTIONS.
Subtitle Language
Preferred Subtitle Languages
A digital broadcast can offer several subtitle
languages for a programme. You can set a preferred
primary and secondary subtitle language. If subtitles
in one of these languages are available, the TV will
show the subtitles you selected.
To set the primary and secondary subtitle language…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Region and
Language > Languages > Primary
Subtitles or Secondary Subtitles.
3 - Select the language you need and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Select a Subtitle Language
If none of the preferred subtitle languages are
available, you can select another subtitle language if
available. If no subtitle languages are available, you
cannot select this option.
To select a subtitle language when none of your
preferred languages are available…
1 - Press OPTIONS.
2 - Select Subtitle Language and select one of the
languages as subtitles temporarily.
Audio Language
Preferred Audio Language
A digital broadcast can offer several audio languages
(spoken languages) for a programme. You can set a
preferred primary and secondary audio language. If
audio in one of these languages is available, the TV
will switch to the audio language.
To set the primary and secondary audio language…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
select Languages > Primary Audio or Secondary
Audio.
3 - Select the language you need and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Select an Audio Language
If none of the preferred audio languages are
available, you can select another audio language if
available. If no audio languages are available, you
cannot select this option.
To select an audio language when none of your
preferred languages are available…
1 - Press OPTIONS.
2 - Select Audio Language and select one of the
languages as audio temporarily.
Common Interface
If you installed a CAM in one of the Common
Interface slots, you can view the CAM and operator
information or do some CAM related settings.
To view the CAM information…
1 - Press SOURCES.
2 - Select the channel type you are using the CAM
for Watch TV.
3 - Press OPTIONS and select Common
Interface.
12
4 - Select the appropriate Common Interface slot
and press (right).
5 - Select the TV operator of the CAM and press OK.
The following screens come from the TV operator.
HbbTV on this Channel
If you want to avoid access to HbbTV pages on a
specific channel, you can block the HbbTV pages for
this channel only.
Switch on HbbTV
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > Advanced > HbbTV settings > HbbTV
> On.
Information
You can view the technical characteristics of a
particular channel, like digital or analogue, sound
type, etc.
To view the technical information on a channel…
1 - Tune to the channel.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Information and
press OK.
3 - To close this screen, press OK.
Mono / Stereo
You can switch the sound of an analogue channel to
Mono or Stereo.
To switch to Mono or Stereo…
1 - Tune to an analoge channel.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Mono/Stereo and
press (right).
3 - Select Mono or Stereo and press OK.
4 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Reorder Channels
Only in a Favourites List you can change the
sequence of channels (reorder).
To change the sequence of channels…
1 - Open the Favourites List you want to reorder.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Reorder
Channels and press OK.
3 - In the Favourites List, select the channel you
want to reorder and press OK.
4 - With the (up) or (down) keys move the
channel where you want it.
5 - Press OK to confirm the new location.
6 - You can reorder channels with the same method
until you close the Favourites List with
the BACK key.
4.4
Favourite Channels
About Favourite Channels
In a favourite channel list, you can collect the
channels you like.
You can create 4 different lists of favourite channels
for easy channel zapping. You can name each
Favourites List individually. Only in a Favourites List
you can reorder channels.
With a Favourites List selected, press the
arrows (up) or (down) to select a channel,
then press OK to watch the selected channel. You
only tune to the channels in that list when
using   or   keys.
Create a Favourites List
To create a favourite channels list…
1 - Press , to switch to TV.
2 - Press OK to open the current channel list.
3 - Press OPTIONS.
4 - Select Create Favourites List and press OK.
5 - In the list at the left, select a channel you want as
a favourite and press OK. Channels come in the list at
the right in the order you add them. To undo, select
the channel in the list at the left and
press OK again.
6 - If necessary, you can go on selecting and adding
channels as favourites.
7 - To finish adding channels, press BACK.
The TV will ask to rename the Favourites List. You can
use the on-screen keyboard.
1 - Use the on-screen keyboard to delete the
current name and enter a new name.
2 - When done, select Close and press OK.
The TV will switch to the newly created Favourites
List.
You can add a range of channels in one go or start a
Favourites List by duplicating the channel list with all
channels and removing the channels you do not
want.
The channels in the Favourites List are renumbered.
13
Add a Range of Channels
To add a consecutive range of channels to a
Favourites List in one go, you can use Select Range.
To add a range of channels…
1 - Open the Favourites List where you want to add a
range of channels.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Select Range and
press OK.
3 - In the list at the left select the first channel of the
range you want to add and press OK.
4 - Press (down) to select the last channel of the
range you want to add. The channels are marked at
the left.
5 - Press OK to add this range of channels and
confirm.
You can also start creating a Favourites List from
Select Range.
Rename a Favourites List
You can only rename a Favourites List.
To rename a Favourites List…
1 - Open the Favourite List you want to rename.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Rename Favourites
List and press OK.
3 - Use the on-screen keyboard to delete the current
name and enter a new name.
4 - When done, select Close and press OK.
5 - Press BACK to close the channel list.
Remove a Favourites List
You can only remove a Favourites List.
To remove a Favourites List…
1 - Open the Favourites List you want to remove.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Remove Favourites
List and press OK.
3 - Confirm to remove the list.
4 - Press BACK to close the channel list.
Reorder Channels
Only in a Favourites List you can change the
sequence of channels (reorder).
To change the sequence of channels…
1 - Open the Favourites List you want to reorder.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Reorder
Channels and press OK.
3 - In the Favourites List, select the channel you
want to reorder and press OK.
4 - With the (up) or (down) keys move the
channel where you want it.
5 - Press OK to confirm the new location.
6 - You can reorder channels with the same method
until you close the Favourites List with
the BACK key.
4.5
Text / Teletext
Text Pages
To open Text/Teletext press TEXT, while you are
watching TV channels.
To close Text, press TEXT again.
Select a Text page
To select a page . . .
1 - Enter the page number with the number keys.
2 - Use the arrow keys to navigate.
3 - Press a colour key to select a colour-coded
subject at the bottom of the screen.
Text sub-pages
A Text page number can hold several subpages. The
subpage numbers are shown on a bar next to the
main page number.
To select a subpage, press or .
T.O.P. Text pages
Some broadcasters offer T.O.P. Text.
To open T.O.P. Text pages within Text,
press OPTIONS and select T.O.P. Overview.
Favourite pages
The TV makes a list of the last 10 Text pages you
opened. You can easily reopen them again in the
Favourite Text pages column.
1 - In Text, select (heart) in the top left corner of
the screen to show the column of favourite pages.
2 - Press (down) or (up) to select a page
number and press OK to open the page.
You can clear the list with the option Clear Favourite
Pages.
Search Text
You can select a word and scan Text for all
occurences of this word.
1 - Open a Text page and press OK.
2 - Select a word or number with the arrow keys.
3 - Press OK again to jump immediately to the next
occurence of this word or number.
4 - Press OK again to jump to the subsequent
occurence.
5 - To stop searching, press (up) until nothing is
selected.
Text from a connected device
14
Some devices that receive TV channels can also offer
Text.
To open Text from a connected device . . .
1 - Press SOURCES, select the device and
press OK.
2 - While watching a channel on the device,
press OPTIONS, select Show Device Keys and
select the key and press OK.
3 - Press BACK to hide the device keys.
4 - To close Text, press BACK again.
Digital Text (UK only)
Some digital broadcasters offer dedicated Digital Text
or interactive TV on their digital TV channels. This
includes normal Text using the number, colour and
arrow keys to select and navigate.
To close Digital Text, press BACK.
Text Options
In Text/Teletext, press OPTIONS to select the
following…
• Freeze page
To stop the automatic rotation of subpages.
• Dual screen / Full screen
To show the TV channel and Text alongside each
other.
• T.O.P. overview
To open T.O.P. Text.
• Enlarge
To enlarge the Text page for comfortable reading.
• Reveal
To unhide hidden information on a page.
• Cycle subpages
To cycle subpages when these are available.
• Hide/Show Favourite Pages
To hide or show the list of favourite pages.
• Clear Favourite Pages
To clear the list of favourite pages.
• Language
To switch the group of characters that Text uses to
display correctly.
• Text 2.5
To activate the Text 2.5 for more colours and better
graphics.
Text Setup
Text language
Some digital TV broadcasters have several Text
languages available.
To set your primary and secondary Text language . . .
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Region and Language and
press (right) to enter the menu.
3 - Select Language > Primary Text or Secondary
Text and press OK.
4 - Select your preferred Text languages.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Text 2.5
If available, Text 2.5 offers more colours and better
graphics. Text 2.5 is activated as a standard factory
setting.
To switch off Text 2.5…
1 - Press TEXT.
2 - With Text/Teletext open on screen,
press OPTIONS.
3 - Select Text 2.5 > Off and press OK.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
15
5
Channel Installation
5.1
Satellite Installation
About Installing Satellites
Up to 4 Satellites
You can install up to 4 satellites (4 LNBs) on this TV.
Select the exact number of satellites you wish to
install at the start of the installation. This will speed up
the installation.
Unicable
You can use a Unicable system to connect the
antenna dish to the TV. You can select Unicable for 1
or for 2 satellites at the start of the installation.
MDU - Multi-Dwelling-Unit
The built-in satellite tuners support MDU on the Astra
satellites and for Digiturk on the Eutelsat satellite.
MDU on Türksat is not supported.
Start the Installation
Make sure your satellite dish is connected correctly
and is perfectly aligned before you start the
installation.
To start the satellite installation…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation and
press OK. Enter your PIN code if necessary.
3 - Select Search for Satellite and press OK.
4 - Select Search and press OK. TV will search for
satellites.
5 - Select Install and press OK. The TV shows the
current satellite installation setup.
If you want to change this setup, select Settings.
If you don't want to change the setup, select Search.
Go to step 5.
6 - In Installation System, select the number of
satellites you want to install or select one of the
Unicable systems. When you select Unicable, you
can choose the User Band Numbers and enter the
User Band Frequencies for each tuner. In some
countries, you can adjust some expert settings for
each LNB in More Settings.
7 - The TV will search for the satellites available on
the alignment of your antenna dish. This may take a
few minutes. If a satellite is found, its name and
reception strength are shown on screen.
8 - When the TV found the satellites you need,
select Install.
9 - If a satellite offers Channel Packages, the TV will
show the available packages for that satellite. Select
the package you need. Some packages offer
a Quick or Full install for their available channels,
select one or the other. The TV will install the satellite
channels and radio stations.
10 - To store the satellite setup and installed
channels and radio stations, select Finish.
Satellite Installation Settings
The satellite installation settings are preset according
your country. These settings determine how the TV
searches and installs satellites and its channels. You
can always change these settings.
To change the satellite installation settings…
1 - Start the satellite installation.
2 - On the screen where you can start searching for
satellites, select Settings and press OK.
3 - Select the number of satellites you want to install
or select one of the Unicable systems. When you
select Unicable, you can choose the User Band
Numbers and enter the User Band Frequencies for
each tuner.
4 - When you're done, select Next and press OK.
5 - On the Settings menu, press the colour
key Done to return to the screen to start
searching for satellites.
Homing Transponder and LNB
In some countries, you can adjust the expert settings
for homing transponder and each LNB. Only use or
change these settings when a normal installation fails.
If you have non-standard satellite equipment, you
can use these settings to overrule the standard
settings. Some providers might give you some
transponder or LNB valeus which you can enter here.
Satellite CAMs
If you use a CAM – a Conditional Access Module with
a smart card – to watch satellite channels, we
recommend to do the satellite installation with the
CAM inserted in the TV.
Most CAMs are used to descramble channels.
Newest generation CAMs (CI+ 1.3 with Operator
Profile), can install all the satellite channels by
themselves on your TV. The CAM will invite you to
install its satellite(s) and channels. These CAMs not
only install and descramble the channels but also
handle regular channel updates.
16
Channel Packages
Satellite operators can offer channel packages that
bundle free channels (free-to-air) and offer a sorting
that suits a country. Some satellites offer subscription
packages - a collection of channels you pay for.
If you choose a subscription package, the TV might
ask you to select a Quick or Full installation.
Select Quick to install the channels of the package
only or select Full to install the package and all
other available channels too. We recommend a Quick
installation for subscription packages. If you have
additional satellites that are not part of your
subscription package, we recommend a Full
installation. All installed channels are put in the
channels list All.
Unicable Setup
The Unicable System
You can use a Single Cable system, MDU or Unicable
system to connect the antenna dish to the TV. A
Single Cable system uses one cable to connect the
satellite dish to all satellite tuners in its system. A
Single Cable system is typically used in apartment
buildings. If you use a Unicable system, the TV will ask
you to assign a user band number and corresponding
frequency during the installation. You can install 1 or 2
satellites with Unicable on this TV.
If you notice some missing channels after a Unicable
installation, another installation might have been
done at the same moment on the Unicable system.
Do the installation again to install the missing
channels.
User Band Number
In a Unicable system, each connected satellite tuner
must be numbered (e.g. 0, 1, 2 or 3 etc.).
You can find the available user bands and their
number on the Unicable switchbox. User band is
sometimes shortened as UB. There are Unicable
switchboxes that offer 4 or 8 user bands. If you select
Unicable in the settings, the TV will ask you to assign
the unique user band number for each built-in
satellite tuners. A satellite tuner cannot have the same
user band number as another satellite tuner in the
Unicable system.
User Band Frequency
Next to the unique user band number, the built-in
satellite receiver needs the frequency of the selected
user band number. These frequencies are mostly
shown next to the user band number on a Unicable
switchbox.
Manual Channel Update
You can always start an channel update yourself.
To start a channel update manually…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation and
press OK.
3 - Select Search for Channels and press OK.
4 - Select Update Channels and press OK. The TV
will start updating. The update may take a few
minutes.
5 - Follow the instructions on screen. The update
may take a few minutes.
6 - Select Finish and press OK.
Add a Satellite
You can add an additional satellite to your current
satellite installation. The installed satellites and their
channels remain untouched. Some satellite operators
do not allow adding a satellite.
The additional satellite should be seen as an extra, it
is not your main satellite subscription or not the main
satellite of which you use its channel package.
Typically, you would add a 4th satellite when you
have 3 satellites already installed. If you have 4
satellites installed, you might consider removing one
first to be able to add a new satellite.
Setup
If you currently have only 1 or 2 satellites installed, the
current installation settings might not allow adding an
extra satellite. If you need to change the installation
settings, you must redo the complete satellite
installation. You cannot use Add satellite if a change
of settings is needed.
To add a satellite…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation and
press OK.
3 - Select Search for satellite and press OK.
4 - Select Add Satellite and press OK. The current
satellites are shown.
5 - Select Search and press OK. The TV will
search for new satellites.
6 - If the TV has found one or more satellites,
select Install and press OK. The TV installs the
17
channels of the found satellites.
7 - Select Finish and press OK to store the
channels and radio stations.
Remove a Satellite
You can remove one or more satellites from your
current satellite installation. You remove the satellite
and its channels. Some satellite operators do not
allow removing a satellite.
To remove satellites…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation and
press OK.
3 - Select Search for satellite and press OK.
4 - Select Remove Satellite and press OK. The
current satellites are shown.
5 - Select a satellite and press OK to mark or
unmark them to remove.
6 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Manual Installation
Manual Installation is intended for expert users.
You can use Manual Installation to quickly add new
channels from a satellite transponder. You need to
know the frequency and polarization of the
transponder. The TV will install all channels of that
transponder. If the transponder was installed before,
all its channels - the former and the new ones - are
moved to the end of the channel list All.
You cannot use Manual installation if you need to
change the number of satellites. If this is needed, you
have to do a complete installation with Install
Satellites.
To install a transponder…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Satellite Installation and
press OK.
3 - Select Manual Installation and press (right)
to enter the menu.
4 - If you have more than 1 satellite installed,
select LNB for which you want to add channels.
5 - Set the Polarisation you need. If you set
the Symbol Rate Mode to Manual, you can enter
the symbol rate in Symbol Rate manually.
6 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the frequency, and select Done.
7 - Select Search and press OK. The signal
strenght is shown on screen.
8 - If you want to store the channels of a new
transponder, select Store and press OK.
9 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Homing Transponder and LNB
In some countries, you can adjust the expert settings
for homing transponder and each LNB. Only use or
change these settings when a normal installation fails.
If you have non-standard satellite equipment, you
can use these settings to overrule the standard
settings. Some providers might give you some
transponder or LNB valeus which you can enter here.
LNB Power
By default, LNB Power is set to On.
22 kHz Tone
By default, the Tone is set to Auto.
Low LO Frequency / High LO Frequency
The local oscillator frequencies are set to standard
values. Adjust the values only in case of exceptional
equipment that needs different values.
Problems
The TV cannot find the satellites I want or the TV
installs the same satellite twice
• Make sure that the correct number of satellites is set
in Settings at the start of the installation. You can set
the TV to search for One, Two or 3/4 satellites.
A dual head LNB cannot find a second satellite
• If the TV finds one satellite but cannot find a second
one, turn the dish a few degrees. Align the dish to get
the strongest signal on the first satellite. Check the
signal strength indicator of the first satellite on screen.
With the first satellite set at the strongest signal, select
Search again to find the second satellite.
• Make sure the settings are set to Two Satellites.
Changing the installation settings did not solve my
problem
• All settings, satellites and channels are only stored
at the end of the installation when you finish.
All satellite channels are gone
• If you use a Unicable system, make sure you
assigned two unique user band numbers for both
built-in tuners in the Unicable settings. It might be
that another satellite receiver in your Unicable system
is using the same user band number.
Some satellite channels seem to have disappeared
from the channel list
• If some channels seem to be gone or displaced, the
broadcaster might have changed the transponder
location of these channels. To restore the channel
positions in the channel list, you can try an update of
18
the channel package.
I cannot remove a satellite
• Subscription packages do not allow removing a
satellite. To remove the satellite, you have to do a
complete installation again and select another
package.
Sometimes the reception is poor
• Check if the satellite dish is solidly mounted. Strong
winds can move the dish.
• Snow and rain can degrade the reception.
5.2
Antenna/Cable Installation
Update Channels
Automatic Channel Update
If you receive digital channels, you can set the TV to
automatically update these channels.
Once a day, at 6 AM, the TV updates the channels
and stores new channels. New channels are stored in
the Channels List and are marked with a .
Channels without a signal are removed. The TV must
be in standby to automatically update channels. You
can switch off Auromatic Channel Update.
To switch off the automatic update…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Automatic Channel Update and
press OK.
5 - Select Off and press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
When new channels are found or if channels are
updated or removed, a message is shown at TV start
up. To avoid this message to appear after every
channel update, you can switch it off.
To switch off the message…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Channel Update Message and press OK.
5 - Select Off and press OK.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
In certain countries, the Automatic channel update is
done while watching TV or on any moment when the
TV is in standby.
Manual Channel Update
You can always start an channel update yourself.
To start a channel update manually…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Search for Channels and press OK.
5 - Select Start and press OK.
6 - Select Update Digital Channels,
select Next and press OK.
7 - Select Start and press OK to update the digital
channels. This can take a few minutes.
8 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Reinstall Channels
Reinstall All Channels
You can reinstall all channels and leave all other TV
settings untouched.
If a PIN code is set, you will need to enter this code
before you can reinstall channels.
To reinstall channels…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Search for Channels and press OK.
5 - Select Start and press OK.
6 - Select Reinstall Channels, select Next and
press OK.
7 - Select the country where you are now and
press OK.
8 - Select Next and press OK.
9 - Select the type of installation you want, Antenna
(DVB-T) or Cable (DVB-C) and press OK.
8 - Select Next and press OK.
11 - Select the type of channels you want, Digital
and Analogue Channels or Only Digital
Channels and press OK.
8 - Select Next and press OK.
13 - Select Start and press OK to update the
digital channels. This can take a few minutes.
14 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
Reinstall TV
You can redo a full TV installation. The TV is
completely reinstalled.
To redo a full TV installation…
19
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings > Reinstall TV and
press OK.
3 - Enter your PIN code if necessary.
4 - Select Yes and press OK to confirm.
5 - The TV will reinstall completely. All settings will
be reset and installed channels will be replaced. The
installation can take a few minutes.
6 - Press (left) to go back one step or
press BACK to close the menu.
DVB-T or DVB-C
DVB-T or DVB-C Reception
During the channel installation, just before you search
for channels, you selected Antenna (DVB-T) or Cable
(DVB-C). Antenna DVB-T searches for terrestrial
analogue channels and digital DVB-T/T2 channels.
Cable DVB-C searches for analogue and digital
channels available from a cable DVB-C operator.
DVB-C Channel Installation
For ease of use, all DVB-C settings are set to
automatic.
If your DVB-C operator gave you specific DVB-C
values, the network ID or network frequency, enter
these values when the TV asks for them during
installation.
Channel Number Conflicts
In some countries, different TV channels
(broadcasters) might have the same channel number.
While installing, the TV shows the list with channel
number conflicts. You need to select which TV
channel you want to install on a channel number with
multiple TV channels.
DVB Settings
Network Frequency Mode
If you intend to use the fast Quick Scan method
in Frequency Scan to search for channels,
select Automatic. The TV will use 1 of the predefined
network frequencies (or HC - homing channel) as
used by most cable operator in your country.
If you received a specific network frequency value to
search for channels, select Manual.
Network Frequency
With the Network Frequency Mode set to Manual,
you can enter the network frequency value received
from your cable operator here. To enter the value, use
the number keys.
Frequency Scan
Select the method of searching for channels. You can
select the faster Quick Scan method and use the
predefined settings used by most cable operator in
your country.
If this results in having no channels installed or if
some channels are missing, you can select the
extended Full Scan method. This method will take
more time to search for and install channels.
Frequency Step Size
The TV searches for channels in steps of 8MHz.
If this results in having no channels installed or if
some channels are missing, you can search in smaller
steps of 1MHz. Using the 1MHz steps will take more
time to search for and install channels.
Digital Channels
If you know your cable operator is not offering digital
channels, you can skip searching for digital channels.
Analogue Channels
If you know your cable operator is not offering
analogue channels, you can skip searching for
analogue channels.
Free / Scrambled
If you have a subscription and a CAM - Conditional
Access Module for pay TV services, select Free +
Scrambled. If you did not subscribe to pay TV
channels or services, you can select Free
Channels Only .
For more information, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up CAM, Conditional
Access Module.
Reception Quality
You can check the quality and signal strength of a
digital channel. If you have your own antenna, you
can reposition the antenna to try and improve the
reception.
To check the reception quality of a digital channel…
1 - Tune to the channel.
2 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK. Enter your PIN code if
necessary.
20
4 - Select Digital: Reception Test and press OK.
5 - Select Search and press OK. The digital
frequency is shown for this channel.
6 - Select Search again and press OK to check the
signal quality of this frequency. The test result is
shown on screen. You can reposition the antenna or
check the connections to possibly improve the
reception.
7 - You can also change the frequency
yourself. Select the frequency number one by one
and use the (up) or (down) keys to change
the value. Select Search and press OK to test the
reception again.
8 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Manual Installation
Analogue TV channels can be manually installed,
channel by channel.
To install analogue channels manually…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels > Antenna/Cable
Installation and press OK. Enter your PIN code if
necessary.
3 - Select Analogue: Manual Installation and
press OK.
• System
To set up the TV system, select System.
Select your country or the part of the world where
you are now and press OK.
• Search Channel
To find a channel, select Search Channel and
press OK. You can enter a frequency yourself to find
a channel or let the TV search for a channel.
Press (right) to select Search and press OK to
search for a channel automatically. The found
channel is shown on screen and if the reception is
poor, press Search again. If you want to store the
channel, select Done and press OK.
• Store
You can store the channel on the current channel
number or as a new channel number.
Select Store Current Channel or Store as New
Channel and press OK. The new channel number is
shown briefly.
You can redo these steps until you have found all
available analogue TV channels.
5.3
Channel List Copy
Introduction
Channel List Copy is intended for dealers and expert
users.
With Channel List Copy, you can copy the channels
installed on one TV onto another Philips TV of the
same range. With Channel List Copy, you avoid the
time-consuming channel search by uploading a
predefined channel list on a TV. Use a USB flash drive
of minimum 1 GB.
Conditions
• Both TVs are from the same year range.
• Both TVs have the same hardware type. Check the
hardware type on the TV type plate on the back of
the TV. Typically noted as Q . . . LA
• Both TVs have compatible software versions.
Current channel version
To check the current version of the channel list…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels, select Channel List Copy,
select Current Version and press OK.
3 - Press OK to close.
Current software version
To check the cuurent version of the TV software…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Update Software and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Current Software Info and press OK.
4 - The version, release notes and creation date are
shown. Also, the Netflix ESN Number is shown if
available.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Copy a Channel List
To copy a channel list…
1 - Switch on the TV. This TV should have channels
installed.
2 - Plug in a USB flash drive.
3 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Channels > Channel List Copy and
press OK.
5 - Select Copy to USB and press OK. You might
be asked to enter the Child Lock PIN code to copy the
channel list.
6 - When copying is done, unplug the USB flash
drive.
7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
21
Now you can upload the copied channel list onto
another Philips TV.
Channel List Version
Check the current version of the channel list...
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Channel List Copy and select Current
Version, then press OK.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Upload a Channel List
To not Installed TVs
Depending on whether your TV is already installed or
not, you must use a different method to upload a
channel list.
To a TV that is not yet installed
1 - Plug in the power plug to start the installation and
select language and country. You can skip the
channel search. Finish the installation.
2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel
list of the other TV.
3 - To start the channel list upload, press ,
select All Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Channels > Channel List Copy > Copy
to TV and press OK. Enter your PIN code if
necessary.
5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to
the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive.
To Installed TVs
Depending on whether your TV is already installed or
not, you must use a different method to upload a
channel list.
To an already installed TV
1 - Verify the country setting of the TV. (To verify this
setting, see chapter Reinstall All Channels. Start this
procedure until you reach the country setting.
Press BACK to cancel the installation.)
If the country is correct continue with step 2.
If the country is not correct, you need to start a
reinstallation. See chapter Reinstall All Channels and
start the installation. Select the correct country and
skip the channels search. Finish the installation. When
done, continue with step 2.
2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel
list of the other TV.
3 - To start the channel list upload, press ,
select All Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Channels > Channel List Copy > Copy
to TV and press OK. Enter your PIN code if
necessary.
5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to
the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive.
5.4
Satellite List Copy
Introduction
Satellite List Copy is intended for dealers and expert
users.
With Satellite List Copy, you can copy the channels
installed on one TV onto another Philips TV of the
same range. With Satellite List Copy, you avoid the
time-consuming channel search by uploading a
predefined channel list on a TV. Use a USB flash drive
of minimum 1 GB.
Conditions
• Both TVs are from the same year range.
• Both TVs have the same hardware type. Check the
hardware type on the TV type plate on the back of
the TV. Typically noted as Q . . . LA
• Both TVs have compatible software versions.
Current channel version
To check the current version of the channel list…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels, select Satellite List Copy,
select Current Version and press OK.
3 - Press OK to close.
Current software version
To check the cuurent version of the TV software…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Update Software and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Current Software Info and press OK.
4 - The version, release notes and creation date are
shown. Also, the Netflix ESN Number is shown if
available.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Copy a Channel List
To copy a channel list…
1 - Switch on the TV. This TV should have channels
installed.
2 - Plug in a USB flash drive.
3 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Channels > Satellite List Copy and
press OK.
22
5 - Select Copy to USB and press OK. You might
be asked to enter the Child Lock PIN code to copy the
channel list.
6 - When copying is done, unplug the USB flash
drive.
7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Now you can upload the copied channel list onto
another Philips TV.
Channel List Version
Check the current version of the channel list...
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Channels and press (right) to enter
the menu.
3 - Select Satellite List Copy and select Current
Version, then press OK.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Upload a Channel List
To not Installed TVs
Depending on whether your TV is already installed or
not, you must use a different method to upload a
channel list.
To a TV that is not yet installed
1 - Plug in the power plug to start the installation and
select language and country. You can skip the
channel search. Finish the installation.
2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel
list of the other TV.
3 - To start the channel list upload, press ,
select All Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Channels > Satellite List Copy > Copy
to TV and press OK. Enter your PIN code if
necessary.
5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to
the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive.
To Installed TVs
Depending on whether your TV is already installed or
not, you must use a different method to upload a
channel list.
To an already installed TV
1 - Verify the country setting of the TV. (To verify this
setting, see chapter Reinstall All Channels. Start this
procedure until you reach the country setting.
Press BACK to cancel the installation.)
If the country is correct continue with step 2.
If the country is not correct, you need to start a
reinstallation. See chapter Reinstall All Channels and
start the installation. Select the correct country and
skip the channels search. Finish the installation. When
done, continue with step 2.
2 - Plug in the USB flash drive that holds the channel
list of the other TV.
3 - To start the channel list upload, press ,
select All Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Channels > Satellite List Copy > Copy
to TV and press OK. Enter your PIN code if
necessary.
5 - The TV notifies you if the channel list is copied to
the TV successfully. Unplug the USB flash drive.
23
6
Connect Devices
6.1
About Connections
Connectivity Guide
Always connect a device to the TV with the highest
quality connection available. Also, use good quality
cables to ensure a good transfer of picture and
sound.
When you connect a device, the TV recognizes its
type and gives each device a correct type name. You
can change the type name if you wish. If a correct
type name for a device is set, the TV automatically
switches to the ideal TV settings when you switch to
this device in the Sources menu.
Antenna port
If you have a Set-top box (a digital receiver) or
Recorder, connect the antenna cables to run the
antenna signal through the Set-top box and/or
Recorder first before it enters the TV. In this way, the
antenna and the Set-top box can send possible
additional channels to the Recorder to record.
HDMI ports
HDMI Quality
An HDMI connection has the best picture and sound
quality. One HDMI cable combines video and audio
signals. Use an HDMI cable for TV signal.
For best signal quality transfer, use a High speed
HDMI cable and do not use an HDMI cable longer
than 5 m.
If a device connected with HDMI is not working
correctly, check if a different HDMI Ultra HD setting
can solve this problem. In Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up HDMI Ultra HD.
Copy protection
HDMI cables support HDCP 2.2 (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection). HDCP is a copy protection
signal that prevents copying content from a DVD disc
or Blu-ray Disc. Also referred to as DRM (Digital
Rights Management).
HDMI ARC
All of the HDMI connections on the TV have HDMI
ARC (Audio Return Channel).
If the device, typically a Home Theatre System (HTS),
also has the HDMI ARC connection, connect it to any
of the HDMI connections on this TV. With the HDMI
ARC connection, you do not need to connect the
extra audio cable that sends the sound of the TV
picture to the HTS. The HDMI ARC connection
combines both signals.
You can use any HDMI connection on this TV to
connect the HTS but ARC is only available for 1
device/connection at a time.
HDMI MHL
With HDMI MHL, you can send what you see on your
Android smartphone or tablet to a TV screen.
The HDMI 1 connection on this TV
incorporates MHL 2.0 (Mobile High-Definition Link).
This wired connection offers great stability and
bandwidth, low latency, no wireless interference and
good quality sound reproduction. On top of that, the
MHL connection will charge the battery of your
smartphone or tablet. Although connected, your
mobile device will not be charging when the TV is on
standby.
Inform yourself about what passive MHL cable is
suited for your mobile device. In particular, with the
HDMI connector for the TV on one side, the type of
connector you need to connect to your smartphone
or tablet.
MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL,
LLC.
24
HDMI CEC - EasyLink
An HDMI connection has the best picture and sound
quality. One HDMI cable combines video and audio
signals. Use an HDMI cable for High Definition (HD)
TV signals. For best signal quality transfer, use a High
speed HDMI cable and do not use an HDMI cable
longer than 5 m.
Connect HDMI CEC-compatible devices to your TV,
you can operate them with the TV remote control.
EasyLink HDMI CEC must be switched on on the TV
and the connected device.
Switch on EasyLink
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > EasyLink > EasyLink > On.
Operate HDMI CEC-compatible devices with TV
remote control
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > EasyLink > EasyLink remote
control > On.
Note:
• EasyLink might not work with devices from other
brands.
• The HDMI CEC functionality has different names on
different brands. Some examples are: Anynet, Aquos
Link, Bravia Theatre Sync, Kuro Link, Simplink and
Viera Link. Not all brands are fully compatible with
EasyLink. Example HDMI CEC branding names are
property of their respective owners.
6.2
CAM with Smart Card - CI+
CI+
This TV is ready for the CI+ Conditional Access .
With CI+ you can watch premium HD programmes,
like movies and sports, offered by digital TV operators
in your region. These programmes are scrambled by
the TV operator and descrambled with a prepaid CI+
module.
Digital TV operators provide a CI+ module
(Conditional Access Module - CAM) and an
accompanying smart card, when you subscribe to
their premium programmes. These programmes have
a high level of copy protection.
Contact a digital TV operator for more information on
terms & conditions.
Smart Card
Digital TV operators provide a CI+ module
(Conditional Access Module - CAM) and an
accompanying smart card, when you subscribe to
their premium programmes.
Insert the smart card into the CAM module. See the
instruction you received from the operator.
To insert the CAM in the TV…
1 - Look on the CAM for the correct method of
insertion. Incorrect insertion can damage the CAM
and TV.
2 - While looking at the back of the TV, with the front
of the CAM facing towards you, gently insert the CAM
into the slot COMMON INTERFACE.
3 - Push the CAM in as far as it will go. Leave it in the
slot permanently.
When you switch on the TV, it may take a few minutes
before the CAM is activated. If a CAM is inserted and
subscription fees are paid (subscription methods can
differ), you can watch the scrambled channels
supported by the CAM smart card.
The CAM and smart card are exclusively for your TV. If
you remove the CAM, you will no longer be able to
watch the scrambled channels supported by the
CAM.
25
6.3
Home Theatre System - HTS
Connect with HDMI ARC
Use an HDMI cable to connect a Home Theatre
System (HTS) to the TV. You can connect a Philips
Soundbar or an HTS with a built-in disc player.
HDMI ARC
If your Home Theatre System has an HDMI ARC
connection, you can use any HDMI connection on the
TV to connect. With HDMI ARC, you do not need to
connect the extra audio cable. The HDMI ARC
connection combines both signals.
All HDMI connections on the TV can offer the Audio
Return Channel (ARC) signal. But once you have
connected the Home Theatre System, the TV can
only send the ARC signal to this HDMI connection.
Audio to video synchronisation (sync)
If the sound does not match the video on screen, you
can set a delay on most Home Theatre Systems with
a disc player to match the sound with the video.
Connect with HDMI
Use an HDMI cable to connect a Home Theatre
System (HTS) to the TV. You can connect a Philips
Soundbar or an HTS with a built-in disc player.
If the Home Theatre System has no HDMI ARC
connection, add an optical audio cable (Toslink) to
send the sound of the TV picture to the Home Theatre
System.
Audio to video synchronisation (sync)
If the sound does not match the video on screen, you
can set a delay on most Home Theatre Systems with
a disc player to match the sound with the video.
Problems with HTS sound
Sound with loud noise
If you watch a video from a plugged in USB flash drive
or connected computer, the sound from your Home
Theatre System might be distorted. This noise is heard
when the audio or video file has DTS sound but the
Home Theatre System has no DTS sound processing.
You can fix this by setting the Digital Out Format of
the TV to Stereo.
Press for All
Settings > Sound > Advanced >
Digital Ou t Format.
No sound
If you cannot hear the sound from the TV on your
Home Theatre System, check if you connected the
HDMI cable to an HDMI ARC connection on the
Home Theatre System. All HDMI connections on the
TV are HDMI ARC connections.
6.4
Smartphones and Tablets
To connect a smartphone or tablet to the TV, you can
use a wireless or wired connection.
Wireless
For a wireless connection, on your smartphone or
tablet download the Philips TV Remote App from
your favourite app store.
Wired
For a wired connection, use the HDMI 1 MHL
connection on the back of the TV.
6.5
Blu-ray Disc Player
Use a High speed HDMI cable to connect the Blu-
ray Disc player to the TV.
If the Blu-ray Disc player has EasyLink HDMI CEC,
you can operate the player with the TV remote
control.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and
look up EasyLink HDMI CEC for more information.
6.6
DVD Player
Use an HDMI cable to connect the DVD player to the
TV.
If the DVD player is connected with HDMI and has
EasyLink CEC, you can operate the player with the TV
remote control.
For more information on EasyLink, in Help, press the
colour key Keywords and look up EasyLink
HDMI CEC.
Y Pb Pr - Component Video is a high quality
connection.
The YPbPr connection can be used for High Definition
(HD) TV signals.
26
6.7
Bluetooth
Pairing a Device
Read the user manual of the device for specific
information on pairing and on wireless range. Make
sure the Bluetooth setting on TV is switched on.
Once a wireless gamepad is paired, you can use it.
When a device is paired, you do not need to pair it
again unless you remove the device.
To pair a bluetooth device with the TV…
1 - Switch on the bluetooth device and place it within
range of the TV.
2 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Wireless and Networks and
press (right) to enter the menu.
4 - Select Bluetooth > Search Bluetooth Device,
and press OK.
5 - Select Start and press OK. Follow the
instuctions on screen. You will pair the device with the
TV and the TV will store the connection. You might
need to unpair a paired device first if the maximum
number of paired devices was reached.
6 - Select the type of device and press OK.
7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
* Your TV doesn't support Bluetooth subwoofer and
Bluetooth speakers.
** HDMI connection is required for sound bar, speaker
and other audio device.
Select a Device
To select a wireless device…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and press OK.
3 - Select Bluetooth > Search for a device and
press OK.
4 - In the list, select the wireless device and
press OK.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Remove a Device
You can connect or disconnect a wireless Bluetooth
device. You can also remove a wireless Bluetooth
device. If you remove a Bluetooth device, the device
will be unpaired.
To remove or disconnect a wireless device…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and press OK.
3 - Select Bluetooth > Remove Bluetooth
device and press OK.
4 - In the list, select the wireless device and
press OK.
5 - Select Disconnect or Remove and press OK.
6 - Select OK and press OK to confirm.
7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
6.8
Headphones
You can connect a set of headphones to
the connection on the back of the TV. The
connection is a mini-jack 3.5mm. You can adjust the
volume of the headphones separately.
To adjust the volume…
1 - Press , select Headphone Volume and
press OK.
2 - Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
the value.
3 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
27
6.9
Game Console
HDMI
For best quality, connect the game console with a
High speed HDMI cable to the TV.
Y Pb Pr
Connect the game console with a component video
cable (Y Pb Pr) and an audio L/R cable to the TV.
6.10
USB Hard Drive
What You Need
If you connect a USB Hard Drive, you can pause or
record digital TV broadcasts (DVB broadcasts or
similar).
Minimum Disk Space
• To Pause
To pause a broadcast, you need a USB 2.0
compatible Hard Drive with a minimum of 4GB disk
space.
• To Record
To pause and record a broadcast, you need a
minimum of 250GB disk space.
For more information on how to install a USB Hard
Drive, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up USB Hard Drive,
installation.
Installation
Before you can pause or record a broadcast, you
must connect and format a USB Hard Drive.
Formatting removes all files from the USB Hard Drive.
1 - Connect the USB Hard Drive to one of
the USB connections on the TV. Do not connect
another USB device to the other USB ports when
formatting.
2 - Switch on the USB Hard Drive and the TV.
3 - When the TV is tuned to a digital TV channel,
press (Pause). Trying to pause will start the
formatting.
Follow the instructions on screen.
When the USB Hard Drive is formatted, leave it
connected permanently.
28
Warning
The USB Hard Drive is formatted exclusively for this
TV, you cannot use the stored recordings on another
TV or PC. Do not copy or change recording files on
the USB Hard Drive with any PC application. This will
corrupt your recordings. When you format another
USB Hard Drive, the content on the former will be lost.
A USB Hard Drive installed on your TV will need
reformatting for use with a computer.
Formatting
Before you can pause or record a broadcast, or store
apps, you must connect and format a USB Hard
Drive. Formatting removes all files from the USB Hard
Drive. If you want to record broadcasts with TV Guide
data from the Internet, you must setup the Internet
connection first before you install the USB Hard Drive.
Warning
The USB Hard Drive is formatted exclusively for this
TV, you cannot use the stored recordings on another
TV or PC. Do not copy or change recording files on
the USB Hard Drive with any PC application. This will
corrupt your recordings. When you format another
USB Hard Drive, the content on the former will be lost.
A USB Hard Drive installed on your TV will need
reformatting for use with a computer.
To format a USB Hard Drive…
1 - Connect the USB Hard Drive to one of the USB
connections on the TV. Do not connect another USB
device to the other USB ports when formatting.
2 - Switch on the USB Hard Drive and the TV.
3 - Select Recordings if you want to perform Pause
TV and Recordings, otherwise, select Apps to store
apps. Follow the instructions on screen.
4 - All files and data will be removed after formatting.
5 - When the USB Hard Drive is formatted, leave it
connected permanently.
For more information, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Pause TV,
Recording, or Apps.
6.11
USB Keyboard
Connect
Connect a USB keyboard (USB-HID type) to enter text
on your TV.
Use one of the USB connections to connect.
Configure
Install the keyboard
To install the USB keyboard, switch on the TV and
connect the USB keyboard to one of
the USB connections on the TV. When the TV
detects the keyboard for the first time, you can select
your keyboard lay-out and test your selection. If you
select a Cyrillic or Greek keyboard layout first, you
can select a secondary Latin keyboard layout.
To change the keyboard layout setting when a layout
was selected…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select USB Keyboard Settings, and press OK to
start the keyboard setup.
Special Keys
Keys for entering text
• Enter key = OK
• Backspace = delete character before cursor
• Arrow keys = navigate within a text field
• To switch between keyboard layouts, if a secondary
layout is set, press the Ctrl + Spacebar keys
simultaneously.
Keys for apps and Internet pages
• Tab and Shift + Tab = Next and Previous
• Home = scroll to the top of the page
• End = scroll to the bottom of the page
• Page Up = jump one page up
• Page Down = jump one page down
• + = zoom in one step
• - = zoom out one step
• * = fit the web page to the screen width
29
6.12
USB Flash Drive
You can view photos or play your music and videos
from a connected USB flash drive.
Insert a USB flash drive in one of
the USB connections on the TV while the TV is
switched on.
The TV detects the flash drive and opens a list
showing its content.
If the contents list does not appear automatically,
press SOURCES and select USB.
To stop watching the USB flash drive content,
press EXIT or select another activity.
To disconnect the USB flash drive, you can pull out
the flash drive anytime.
Ultra HD on USB
You can view photos in Ultra HD resolution from a
connected USB device or flash drive. The TV will
downscale the resolution to Ultra HD if the resolution
of the photo is higher. You cannot play a native Ultra
HD video on any of the USB connections.
For more information on watching or playing content
from a USB flash drive, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Photos, Videos and
Music.
6.13
Photo Camera
To view photos stored on your digital photo camera,
you can connect the camera directly to the TV.
Use one of the USB connections on the TV to
connect. Switch on the camera after you made the
connection.
If the contents list does not appear automatically,
press SOURCES , and select USB.
Your camera might need to be set to transfer its
content with PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol). Read
the user manual of the digital photo camera.
Ultra HD on USB
You can view photos in Ultra HD resolution from a
connected USB device or flash drive. The TV will
downscale the resolution to Ultra HD if the resolution
of the photo is higher. You cannot play a native Ultra
HD video on any of the USB connections.
For more information on viewing photos, in Help,
press the colour key Keywords and look
up Photos, Videos and Music.
6.14
Camcorder
For best quality, use an HDMI cable to connect the
camcorder to the TV.
6.15
Computer
30
Connect
You can connect your computer to the TV and use
the TV as a PC monitor.
With HDMI
Use an HDMI cable to connect the computer to the
TV.
With DVI to HDMI
Alternatively, you can use a DVI to HDMI adapter
(sold separately) to connect the PC to HDMI and an
audio L/R cable (mini-jack 3.5mm) to AUDIO IN L/R
on the back of the TV.
Ideal Setting
If you connect a computer, we advice you to give the
connection, on which the computer is connected, the
correct device type name in the Source menu. If you
then switch to Computer in the Source menu, the TV
is set to the ideal Computer setting automatically.
To set the TV to the ideal setting…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Computer, and press OK.
4 - Select On or Off, and press OK.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
31
7
Connect your
Android TV
7.1
Network and Internet
Home Network
To enjoy the full capabilities of your Philips Android
TV, your TV must be connected to the Internet.
Connect the TV to a home network with a high-speed
Internet connection. You can connect your TV
wirelessly or wired to your network router.
Connect to Network
Wireless Connection
What You Need
To connect the TV to the Internet wirelessly, you need
a Wi-Fi router with a connection to the Internet.
Use a high-speed (broadband) connection to the
Internet.
Make the Connection
Make the Connection - Wireless
(TV menu) > Settings > Wireless and
Networks > Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to
Network > Wireless.
1 - In the list of found networks, select on your
wireless network. If your network is not in the list
because the network name is hidden (you switched
off the SSID broadcast of the router), select Add New
Network to enter the network name yourself.
2 - Depending on the type of router, enter your
encryption key - WEP, WPA or WPA2. If you entered
the encryption key for this network before, you can
select OK to make the connection immediately.
3 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
Make the Connection - WPS
(TV menu) > Settings > Wireless and
Networks > Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to
Network > WPS.
If your router has WPS, you can directly connect to
the router without scanning for networks. If you have
devices in your wireless network that use the WEP
security encryption system, you cannot use WPS.
1 - Go to the router, press the WPS button and return
to the TV within 2 minutes.
2 - Select Connect to make the connection.
3 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
Make the Connection - WPS with PIN Code
(TV menu) > Settings > Wireless and
Networks > Wired or Wi-Fi > Connect to
Network > WPS with PIN Code.
If your router has WPS with a PIN code, you can
directly connect to the router without scanning for
networks. If you have devices in your wireless
network that use the WEP security encryption system,
you cannot use WPS.
1 - Write down the 8-digit PIN code shown on screen
and enter it in the router software on your PC. Consult
the router manual on where to enter the PIN code in
the router software.
2 - Select Connect to make the connection.
3 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
Problems
Wireless network not found or distorted
• Microwave ovens, DECT phones or other Wi-Fi
802.11b/g/n devices in your proximity might disturb
the wireless network.
• Make sure that the firewalls in your network allow
access to the TV's wireless connection.
• If the wireless network does not work properly in
your home, try the wired network installation.
Internet does not work
• If the connection to the router is OK, check the
router connection to the Internet.
The PC and Internet connection are slow
• Look in your wireless router's user manual for
information on indoor range, transfer rate and other
factors of signal quality.
• Use a high-speed (broadband) Internet connection
for your router.
DHCP
• If the connection fails, you can check the DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) setting of the
router. DHCP should be switched on.
In Help, press the colour key Keywords and look
up Troubleshooting for more information.
32
Wired Connection
What You Need
To connect the TV to the Internet, you need a
network router with a connection to the
Internet. Use a high-speed (broadband) connection
to the Internet.
Make the Connection
(TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired
or Wi-Fi > Connect to Network > Wired.
1 - Connect the router to the TV with a network cable
(Ethernet cable**).
2 - Make sure that the router is switched on.
3 - The TV constantly searches for the network
connection.
4 - A message will be shown when the connection is
successful.
If the connection fails, you can check the DHCP
setting of the router. DHCP should be switched on.
**To fulfill EMC regulations, use a shielded FTP Cat.
5E Ethernet cable.
Network Settings
View Network Settings
(TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired
or Wi-Fi > View Network Settings.
You can view all current network settings here. The IP
and MAC address, signal strength, speed, encryption
method, etc.
Network Configuration - Static IP
(TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired
or Wi-Fi > Network Configuration > Static IP.
If you are an advanced user and want to install your
network with Static IP addressing, set the TV to Static
IP.
Network Configuration - Static IP Configuration
(TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired
or Wi-Fi > Network Configuration > Static IP
Configuration.
1 - Select Static IP Configuration and configure the
connection.
2 - You can set the number for IP
Address, Netmask, Gateway, DNS 1, or DNS 2.
Switch On with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN)
(TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired
or Wi-Fi > Switch On with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN).
You can switch this TV on from your smartphone or
tablet if the TV is in Standby. The setting Switch On
with Wi-Fi (WoWLAN) must be switched on.
Switch on Wi-Fi connection
(TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired
or Wi-Fi > Wi-Fi On/Off.
You can switch on or off Wi-Fi connection on your
TV.
Digital Media Renderer - DMR
(TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired
or Wi-Fi > Digital Media Renderer - DMR.
If your media files do not play on your TV, make sure
that the Digitial Media Renderer is switched on. As a
factory setting, DMR is switched on.
TV Network Name
(TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired
or Wi-Fi > TV Network Name.
If you have more than one TV in your home network,
you can give the TV a unique name.
Clear Internet Memory
(TV menu) > Settings > Networks > Wired
or Wi-Fi > Clear Internet Memory.
With Clear Internet Memory you clear your Philips
server registration and parental rating settings, your
video store app logins, all Philips App Gallery
favourites, Internet bookmarks and history. Interactive
MHEG applications can also save so-called 'cookies',
on your TV. These files will also be cleared.
33
7.2
Google Account
Sign In
To enjoy the full capabilities of your Philips Android
TV, you can sign in to Google with your Google
Account.
By signing in you'll be able to play your favourite
games across phone, tablet and TV. You'll also get
customised video and music recommendations on
your TV home screen as well as access to YouTube,
Google Play and other apps.
Sign In
Use your existing Google Account to sign in to
Google on your TV. A Google Account consists of an
email address and a password. If you don't have an
Google Account yet, use your computer or tablet to
create one (accounts.google.com). To play games
with Google Play, you need a Google+ profile. If you
did not sign in during the first TV installation, you can
always sign in later.
To sign in after you did the TV installation…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Android Settings and press OK.
3 - Press (down) and select Personal > Add
account and press OK.
4 - Press OK on SIGN IN.
5 - With the on-screen keyboard, enter your email
address and press OK.
6 - Enter your password and press the same
small OK key to sign in.
7 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
If you want to sign in with another Google Account,
first sign out and sign in with the other account.
Android Settings
You can set or view several Android specific settings
or information. You can find the list of apps installed
on your TV and the storage space they need. You can
set the language you like to use with Voice
Search. You can configure the onscreen keyboard or
allow apps to use your location. Explore the different
Android settings. You can go
to www.support.google.com/androidtv for more
information on these settings.
To open these settings…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Android Settings, and press OK.
3 - Explore the different Android settings.
4 - Press BACK if necessary, to close the menu.
34
8
Apps
8.1
About Apps
You can find all installed apps in
the Apps section of the Home menu.
Like apps on your smartphone or tablet, the apps on
your TV offer specific functions for an enriched TV
experience. Apps like YouTube, games, video stores
or weather forecasts (a.o.). You can use the Internet
app to surf the Internet.
Apps can come from the Philips App Gallery or
the Google Play™ Store . To get you started, some
practical apps are pre-installed on your TV.
To install apps from the Philips App Gallery or the
Google Play Store, the TV must be connected to the
Internet. You must agree to the Terms of Use to use
apps from the App Gallery. You must sign in with a
Google Account to use the Google Play apps and
Google Play Store.
8.2
Google Play
Movies and TV
With Google Play Movies & TV, you can rent or buy
movies and TV shows to watch on TV.
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to
purchase movies and TV shows
To rent or buy a movie or TV show…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Movies & TV and press OK.
3 - Select a movie or TV show and press OK.
4 - Select the purchase you want and press OK. You
will be taken through the purchase procedure.
To watch a rented or bought movie or TV show…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Movies & TV and press OK.
3 - Select the movie or TV show from your library in
the app, select the titel and press OK.
4 - You can use
the (stop), (pause), (rewind) or (fast
forward) keys on the remote control.
5 - To stop the Movies & TV app, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information on
support.google.com/androidtv
Music
With Google Play Music, you can play your favourite
music on TV.
With Google Play Music you can buy new music on
your computer or mobile device. Or, on your TV, you
can sign up for All Access, the Google Play Music
subscription. Alternatively, you can play the music
you already own, stored on your computer.
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to take a
music subscription
To start Google Play Music…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Music and press OK.
3 - Select the music you want and press OK.
4 - To stop the Music app, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information on
support.google.com/androidtv
Games
With Google Play Games, you can play games on TV.
Online or offline.
You can see what your friends are playing currently or
you can join the game and compete. You can track
your achievements or start wherever you left off.
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to
purchase new games
Start the Google Play Games app to select and install
new game apps on your TV. Some games are free of
charge. A message appears if a particular game needs
a gamepad to play the game.
To start or stop a Google Play Game…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
35
Games and press OK.
3 - Select a game to play or select a new game to
install and press OK.
4 - When done, press BACK repeatedly or
press EXIT or stop the app with its dedicated
exit/stop button.
The games you install will also appear in the row of
Games in the Home menu
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information on
support.google.com/androidtv
Google Play Store
From the Google Play Store you can download and
install new apps. Some apps are free of charge.
What You Need
• your TV must be connected with the Internet
• you must sign in with your Google Account on TV
• add a credit card to your Google Account to
purchase apps
To install a new app…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Store and press OK.
3 - Select the app you want to install and press OK.
4 - To close the Google Play Store, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
Parental controls
In the Google Play Store, you can hide apps
according to users/buyers maturity. You need to enter
a PIN code to select or change the level of maturity.
To set the parental control…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Apps > Google Play
Store and press OK.
3 - Select Settings > Parental controls and
press OK.
4 - Select the level of maturity you want.
5 - On request, enter the PIN code.
6 - To close the Google Play Store, press BACK
repeatedly or press EXIT.
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information
on support.google.com/androidtv
Payments
To make a payment on Google Play on TV, you must
add a form of payment - a credit card (outside the
United States) - to your Google Account. When you
purchase a movie or TV show, you will be charged on
this credit card.
To add a credit card …
1 - On your computer, go to accounts.google.com
and sign in with the Google Account you will use with
Google Play on TV.
2 - Go to wallet.google.com to add a card to your
Google Account.
3 - Enter your credit card data and accept the terms
and conditions.
8.3
App Gallery
Connect the TV to the Internet to enjoy apps selected
by Philips. These apps are made specially for
TV. The Philips App Gallery offers a wide diversity
of apps. For some countries, you can install apps of a
local Videostore or apps from TV broadcasters in your
country. The latter can offer Catch-Up TV services.
Downloading and installing App Gallery apps is free
of charge.
The Philips App Gallery collection of apps can differ
per country or region.
Some App Gallery apps are pre-installed on your TV.
To install other apps from the App Gallery, you will be
asked to agree to the Terms of Use. You can set the
Privacy Settings according to your preference.
To install an app from the App Gallery…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and select Philips Collection >
App Gallery and press OK.
3 - Select an app icon and press OK.
4 - Select Install and press OK.
8.4
Start or Stop an App
You can start an app from the Home menu.
To start an app…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down to Apps and select the app you
want and press OK.
3 - To stop an app, press BACK or press EXIT
or stop the app with its dedicated exit/stop button.
36
8.5
Lock Apps
About App Locks
You can lock apps unsuited for children. You can lock
18+ rated apps from the App Gallery or set up a
restricted profile in the Home menu.
18+
The 18+ app lock will ask for a PIN code when you try
to start an 18+ rated app. This lock is only valid for 18+
rated apps from the Philips App Gallery.
Restricted profile
You can set up a restructed profile for the Home
menu where only the apps you allow are available.
You need to enter a PIN code to set up and switch on
the restricted profile.
Google Play Store - Maturity
In the Google Play Store, you can hide apps
according to users/buyers maturity. You need to enter
a PIN code to select or change the level of maturity.
The level of maturity will determine which apps are
available for instalation.
Lock 18+ rated apps
You can lock 18+ rated apps from the Philips App
Gallery. This setting controls the 18+ setting in the
Philips App Gallery Privacy Settings.
To lock 18+ rated apps…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Child Lock, select App Lock and press OK.
3 - Select On and press OK.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
For more information, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Child Lock, App
Lock for more information.
Restricted Profile
About Restricted Profile
You can restrict the use of certain apps by switching
the TV to a restricted profile. The Home menu will
only show the apps you allowed. You need a PIN
code to switch out of the restricted profile.
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you
cannot…
• Find or open apps which are marked as Not allowed
• Access the Google Play Store
• Purchase through Google Play Movies & TV, nor
Google Play Games
• Use third-party apps that don't use the Google sign-
in
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you can…
• Watch content already rented or purchased from
Google Play Movies & TV
• Play games already purchased and installed from
Google Play Games
• Access the following settings: Wi-Fi network, Speech
and Accessibility
• Add Bluetooth accessories
The Google Account on TV will stay logged in. Using a
restricted profile doesn't change the Google Account.
Set Up
To set up the restricted profile…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Android Settings and press OK.
3 - Press (down) and select Personal > Security &
restrictions and press OK.
4 - Select Restricted Profile and press OK.
5 - Select Settings and press OK.
6 - Enter a PIN code with the remote control.
7 - Select Allowed apps and press OK.
8 - In the list of available apps, select an app and
press OK to allow or not allow this app.
9 - Press BACK to go back one step or press
EXIT to close the menu.
Now you can enter the restricted profile.
With the PIN code, you can always change the PIN
code or edit the list of allowed or not allowed apps.
Enter
To enter (switch to) the restricted profile…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Android Settings and press OK.
3 - Press (down) and
select Personal > Security & restrictions and
press OK.
4 - Select Enter restricted profile and press OK.
5 - Enter a PIN code with the remote control.
6 - Press BACK to go back one step or
press EXIT to close the menu.
You can see when a restricted profile is entered if an
icon appears in the Home screen. Scroll down
to Settings and scroll to the far right.
37
Exit
To exit the restricted profile…
1 - Press HOME, scroll down to Settings and
scroll far right.
2 - Select Restricted Profile and press OK.
3 - Select Exit restricted profile and press OK.
4 - Enter the PIN code. The TV will exit the restricted
profile.
8.6
Manage Apps
If you stop an app and return to the Home menu, the
app is not really stopped. The app is still running in
the background to be readily available when you start
it again. To run fluently, most apps need to save some
data in the cache memory of the TV. It might be good
to stop an app completely or clear the cache data of
a particular app to optimise the overall performance
of apps and to keep memory usage low on your
Android TV. Also, it is best to uninstall apps that you
are not using anymore.
8.7
Storage
You can see how much storage space - the internal
TV memory - you are using for your apps, videos,
music, etc. You can see how much free space you still
have available for installing new apps. Check your
storage if apps start to run slow or in case of app
trouble.
To see how much storage you are using…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Android Settings and press OK.
3 - Select Device > Storage & reset and
press OK.
4 - View the storage usage of the TV memory.
5 - Press BACK to go back one step or
press EXIT to close the menu.
USB Hard Drive
If you connect a USB Hard Drive, you can use the
drive to extent the TV memory to store more apps.
Allow the USB Hard Drive to be used as an additional
TV memory during the formatting process. The TV will
try to store new apps on the USB Hard Drive first.
Some apps do not allow to be stored on a USB Hard
Drive.
To migrate your existing data, go to All Settings >
Android Settings > Device> Storage & reset and select
the USB Hard Drive.
38
9
Internet
9.1
Start Internet
You can browse the Internet on your TV. You can
view any Internet website but most of them are not
prepared for a TV screen.
• Some plug-ins (e.g. to view pages or videos) are not
available on your TV.
• You cannot send or download files.
• Internet pages are shown one page at a time and
full screen.
To start the Internet browser…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Scroll down and
select Apps > Internet and press OK.
3 - Enter an Internet address and select ,
press OK.
4 - To close Internet, press HOME or EXIT.
9.2
Options on Internet
Some extras are available for the Internet.
To open the extras…
1 - With the website open, press OPTIONS.
2 - Select one of the items and press OK.
• Add to speed dial: To enter a new Internet address.
• Add to bookmarks: Add the page as bookmark
• Page security: To view the security level of the
current page.
• New private tab: Open new private tab, and have
private browsing
• Settings: Settings for Zoom, Text size, Accessibility
mode, Always show menu bar, and clear (browsing)
history
• Help: Internet browser information
• Exit Internet browser: Close Internet browser
39
10
TV Menu
10.1
About TV Menu
If the TV cannot be connected with the Internet, you
can use the TV Menu as your Home menu.
In the TV Menu, you will find every TV function.
10.2
Open TV Menu
To open TV Menu and open an item…
1 - Press to open TV Menu.
2 - Select an item and press OK to open or start it.
3 - Press BACK to close TV Menu without
starting anything.
40
11
Sources
11.1
Switch to a device
From the list of Sources, you can switch to any of the
connected devices. You can switch to a tuner to
watch TV, open the content of a connected USB Flash
Drive or see the recordings you made on a connected
USB Hard Drive. You can switch to your connected
devices to watch their programme, a digital receiver or
a Blu-ray Disc player.
To switch to a connected device…
1 - Press SOURCES to open the Sources menu.
2 - Select one of the item in the source list and
press OK. The TV will show the programme or
content of the device.
3 - Press SOURCES again to close the menu.
One Touch Play
With the TV in standby, you can switch on a disc
player with your TV remote control.
To switch on both disc player and TV from standby
and start playing the disc immediately,
press (play) on the TV remote control. The device
must be connected with an HDMI cable and both TV
and device must have HDMI CEC switched on.
11.2
Options for a TV Input
Some TV input devices offer specific settings.
To set the options for a specific TV input…
1 - Press SOURCES.
2 - Select the TV input in the list and press OK.
3 - Press OPTIONS. You can set the options for
the selected TV input here.
4 - Press OPTIONS again to close the Options
menu.
Possible options…
Controls
With this option you can operate the connected
device with the TV remote control. The device must
be connected with an HDMI cable and both TV and
device must have HDMI CEC switched on.
Device Info
Open this option to view information on the
connected device.
11.3
Device Name and Type
When you connect a new device to the TV and the TV
detects the device, you can assign an icon that fits the
device type. If you connect a device with an HDMI
cable and HDMI CEC, the TV detects the device type
automatically and the device gets an appropriate
icon.
The device type determines picture and sound styles,
resolution values, specific settings or the position
within the Sources menu. You don't have to worry
about the ideal settings.
Rename or Change Type
You can always change the name or change the type
of a connected device. Look for the icon at the
right of the device name in the Sources menu. Some
TV input sources do not allow a name change.
To change the device type…
1 - Select the device in the Sources menu.
2 - Press (right) to select the icon and
press OK.
3 - Press BACK to hide the on-screen keyboard.
4 - Press (down) to find all available device
types. Select the type you want and press OK.
5 - If you want to reset the type of the device to the
original connector type, select Reset and press OK.
6 - Select Close and press OK to close this menu.
To change the device name…
1 - Select the device in the Sources menu.
2 - Press (right) to select the icon and
press OK.
3 - Use the on-screen Keyboard to delete the
current name and enter a new one. Press to
confirm.
4 - Press BACK to hide the on-screen keyboard.
5 - If you want to reset the name of the device to the
original connector name, select Reset and
press OK.
6 - Select Close and press OK to close this menu.
11.4
Rescan Connections
You can rescan all TV connections to update the
Sources menu with recently connected devices.
To rescan the connections…
1 - Press SOURCES to open the Sources menu.
2 - Press (up) to select the icon at the top
right of the Sources menu.
3 - Press OK to start scanning the connections.
Newly connected devices will be added to the
41
Sources menu.
42
12
Networks
12.1
Network
For more information, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Network, for more
information on connecting the TV to a network.
12.2
Bluetooth
Pairing a Device
For more information, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Bluetooth,
Pairing for more information on pairing wireless
devices.
Remove a Device
For more information, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Bluetooth, Remove
device for more information on how to unpair
(remove) a wireless Bluetooth device.
Bluetooth On or Off
To connect wireless Bluetooth devices, make sure
Bluetooth is switched on.
To switch Bluetooth on…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Wireless and Networks and press OK.
3 - Select Bluetooth > Bluetooth On/Off and
press OK.
4 - Select On or Off and press OK.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
43
13
Settings
13.1
Picture
Picture Settings
Picture Style
Select a style
(TV menu) > Settings > Picture > Picture
style.
For easy picture adjustment, you can select a preset
picture style.
• Personal - The picture preferences you set during
the first start up.
• Vivid - Ideal for daylight viewing
• Natural - Natural picture settings
• Standard - Most energy conscious setting -
Factory setting
• Movie - Ideal for watching movies
• Game - Ideal for playing games
• Day - For ISF Calibration
• Night - For ISF Calibration
When TV receives HDR signal, select a picture style
below:
• HDR Personal
• HDR Vivid
• HDR Natural
• HDR Movie
• HDR Game
• Day - For ISF Calibration
• Night - For ISF Calibration
Restore a Style
1 - Select the picture style you want to restore.
2 - Press the colour key Restore style, and
press OK. The style is restored.
Customise a Style
Any picture setting you adjust, like Colour or Contrast,
is stored in the currently selected Picture Style. It
allows you to customise each style.
Only the style Personal can save its settings for
each source in the Sources menu.
Colour, Contrast, Sharpness, Brightness
Adjust the picture colour
(TV menu) > Settings > Picture > Colour.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the
colour saturation value of the picture.
Adjust the picture contrast
(TV menu) > Settings > Picture > Contrast.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the
contrast value of the picture.
You can decrease contrast value to reduce power
consumption.
Adjust the picture sharpness
(TV
menu) > Settings > Picture > Sharpness.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the
sharpness value of the picture.
Adjust brightness
(TV
menu) > Settings > Picture > Brightness.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to set the
level of brightness of the picture signal.
Note: Setting of brightness much away from
reference value (50) may result lower contrast.
Advanced Picture Settings
Computer Setting
(TV
menu) > Settings
> Picture > Advanced > Computer .
Set to On to have the ideal picture setting for use
your TV as a computer monitor.
Colour Settings
Advanced Colour Settings
(TV
menu) > Settings
> Picture > Advanced > Colour.
Adjust the colour enhancement
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Colour > Colou
r enhancement.
Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to set the
level of the colour intensity and the details in bright
44
colours.
Select the preset colour temperature
(TV
menu) > Settings
> Picture > Advanced > Colour > Colour temp
erature.
Select Normal, Warm, or Cool to set the colour
temperature for your preference.
Customise colour temperature
(TV
menu) > Settings
> Picture > Advanced > Colour > Custom Colo
ur temperature.
Select Custom in Colour temperature menu
to customise a colour temperature yourself. Press
the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the
value. WP is white point and BL is black level. You
can also select one of the presets in this menu.
ISF Colour Settings
About ISF
Get the most out of your TV display with ISF®
Calibration. Ask a ISF calibration expert to come to
your home and set the TV to the most optimal picture
setting.
Ask your dealer for an ISF Calibration.
Calibration benefits are…
• better picture clarity and sharpness
• better detail in bright and dark parts
• deeper and darker blacks
• better colour purity and quality
• optmise the picture viewing effect in your home for
both daylight and night conditions
The ISF Calibration expert stores and locks the ISF
settings as two picture styles.
When the ISF Calibration is done, press (TV
menu) > Settings > Picture > Picture
Style > Day or Night. Select Day to
watch TV during bright light conditions or
select Night when it's dark.
Colour control (Hue, Saturation)
(TV
menu) > Settings
> Picture > Advanced > Colour > Colour
control.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the
value of Hue and Saturation, or select Reset
all to reset all value to default.
RGB only mode
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Colour > RGB
only mode.
Select Red, Green, or Blue to switch picture as
selected colour only, or select Off to turn off RGB
mode.
Advanced Contrast Settings
Contrast Modes
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > Cont
rast mode.
Select Normal, Optimized for picture, or Optimized
for energy savings to set the TV automatically
reduces the contrast, for best power consumption or
for best picture experience, or select Off to switch
off the adjustment.
HDR Settings
If you are watching HDR programmes - programmes
recorded in HDR - there is no need to upscale to HDR
and the HDR setting is unavailable. The TV can play
HDR programmes from a HDMI connection, from an
Internet source or from a connected USB memory
device.
If you are watching HDR (High-Dynamic
Range) programmes - programmes recorded in HDR
- The TV will automatically switched to HDR mode
with indication.
HDR Upscaling control is unavailable. The TV can play
HDR programmes* from HDMI 1 or HDMI
2 connection, broadcasting, from an Internet source
or from a connected USB memory device.
* Only HDR10 and Hybrid Log Gamma HDR are
supported
HDR Upscalling
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > HDR
upscalling.
Select On to boost the brightness and contrast of
the picture. The picture is much brighter and has a
45
higher level of contrast between lighter and darker
parts. HDR upscaling keeps colours rich and
saturated.
Note:
• Available when SDR (Standard Dynamic Range)
signal is detected.
• Not available when video content is supported HDR.
HDR Perfect
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > HDR
Perfect.
Select HDR Perfect for superior contrast and
brightness effect.
Note: Available when HDR (High-Dynamic Range)
signal is detected.
Perfect Contrast
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > Perf
ect contrast.
Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to set the
level at which the TV automatically enhances the
details in the dark, middle and light areas of the
picture.
Video Contrast, Gamma
Video contrast
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > Vide
o contrast.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the
video contrast level.
Gamma
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Contrast > Gam
ma.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to set a non-
linear setting for picture luminance and contrast.
Ultra Resolution
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Sharpness > Ult
ra Resolution.
Select On to have a superior sharpness in line edges
and details.
Picture Clean
Noise reduction
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Picture
clean > Noise reduction.
Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to set the
level for removing the noise in video content.
Noise is mostly visible as small moving dots in on-
screen picture.
MPEG Artefact Reduction
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Picture
clean > MPEG Artefact Reduction.
Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to have
different degress of smoothing the artefects in digital
video content.
MPEG artefacts are mostly visible as small blocks or
jagged edges in on-screen images.
Motion Settings
Motion Styles
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Motion > Motio
n styles.
Motion styles provides optimised motion setting
modes for different video content.
Select one of the motion styles to have better viewing
experience.
(Movie, Sports, Standard, Smooth, Personal)
Not available for below cases:
• (TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Computer set
to On.
• (TV menu) > Settings > Picture > Picture
style > Game.
46
Natural Motion
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Motion > Natur
al Motion.
Natural Motion makes any movement smooth and
fluent.
Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to have
different degress for reducing the motion judder,
visible in movies on TV.
Select Minimum or Off when noise appears in
playing moving picture on-screen.
Note: Only available when Motion styles set
to Personal.
Perfect Clear Motion*
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Picture > Advanced > Motion > Perfe
ct Clear Motion.
Perfect Clear Motion makes any movement smooth
and fluent.
Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to have
different degress for reducing the motion judder,
visible in movies on TV.
Select Minimum or Off when noise appears in
playing moving picture on-screen.
Note: Only available when Motion styles set
to Personal.
* Only for 7502/8102/8602/9002 series
Clear Image Residual
Displaying a still image for a prolonged period of time
may cause an image sticking. This phenomenon is
normal character for OLED panel.
Avoid displaying a fixed image on the TV screen for
an extended length of time.
Or you can clear such image retention on-screen by
activating this function.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Advanced > Clear Image Residual.
4 - Select Confirm.
The TV will be switched off until the process is
completed.
If you are recording something, the process will be
paused, and restart until the recording is completed. It
might take more than 1 hour.
If you turn the TV on during the process, it will be
stopped and will be restarted automatically when the
TV switches to standby at a later time.
While processing, a white line may appear on the
screen. This is normal when clearing on-screen image
retention.
Picture Format
If the picture is not filling the whole screen, if black
bars are showing on the top or bottom or at both
sides, you can adjust the picture to fill the screen
completely.
To select one of the basic settings to fill the screen…
1 - While watching a TV channel, press .
2 - Select Picture Format > Fill Screen, Fit to
Screen, Wide Screen and Original, and press OK.
3 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
• Fill Screen – automatically enlarges the picture to
fill the screen. Picture distortion is minimal, subtitles
remain visible. Not suitable for PC input. Some
extreme picture formats can still show black bars.
• Fit to Screen – automatically zooms in the picture
to fill the screen without distortion. Black bars may be
visible. Not suitable for PC input.
• Wide Screen – automatically zooms in the picture
to wide screen.
• Original – automatically zooms in the picture to
wide screen.
To format the picture manually…
1 - While watching a TV channel, press .
2 - Select Advanced and press OK.
3 - Use Shift, Zoom, and Stretch to adjust the
picture.
4 - Or select Undo to return to the setting the
picture had when you opened Picture Format.
• Shift – Select on the arrows to shift the picture. You
can only shift the picture when it is zoomed in.
• Zoom – Select on the arrows to zoom in.
• Stretch – Select on the arrows to stretch the
picture vertically or horizontally.
• Undo – Select to return to the picture format you
started with.
Quick Picture Setting
During the first installation, you did some picture
settings in a few easy steps. You can redo these steps
with Quick Picture Setting. To do these steps, make
sure the TV can tune to a TV channel or can show a
programme from a connected device.
To set the picture in a few easy steps…
47
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Picture and press (right) to enter the
menu.
3 - Select Quick Picture Setting, and press OK.
4 - Use the navigation keys to select your choice.
5 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
13.2
Sound
Sound Style
Select a style
(TV menu) > Settings > Sound > Sound
style.
For easy sound adjustment, you can select a preset
setting with sound style.
• Personal - The sound preferences you set during
the first start up.
• Original - Most neutral sound setting
• Movie - Ideal for watching movies
• Music - Ideal for listening to music
• Game - Ideal for gaming
• News - Ideal for speech
Restore a Style
1 - Select the sound style you want to restore.
2 - Press the colour key Restore Style, and
press OK. The style is restored.
Bass, Treble, Headphone Volume,
Surround Sound
Bass
(TV menu) > Settings > Sound > Bass.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to
adjust the level of low tones in the sound.
Treble
(TV menu) > Settings > Sound > Treble.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the
level of high tones in the sound.
Headphone volume
(TV
menu) > Settings > Sound > Headphone
volume.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the
volume of a connected headphone separately.
Switch on surround sound effect
(TV menu) > Settings > Sound > Surround
sound > On.
Advanced Sound Settings
Volume Control
Auto volume levelling
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Sound > Advanced > Auto volume
levelling.
Select On to automatically level out sudden
volume differences. Typically when you are
switching channels.
Delta volume
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Sound > Advanced > Delta volume.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the
delta value for TV speaker volume.
Audio Out Settings
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Sound > Advanced > Audio out.
Set the TV to play the sound on TV or on the
connected audio system.
You can select where you want to hear the TV sound
and how you want to control it.
• If you select TV Speakers Off, you permanently
switch off the TV speakers.
• If you select TV Speakers, the TV speakers are
always on.
With an audio device connected with HDMI CEC,
select HDMI sound system. The TV will switch off
the TV speakers when the device is playing the
sound.
Clear Dialogue
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Sound > Advanced > Clear dialogue.
48
Select On to improve the sound for speech. Ideal for
news programmes.
Digital Output Settings
Digital output settings are available for optical and
HDMI ARC sound signals.
Digital out format
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Sound > Advanced > Digital out
format.
Set the audio out signal of the TV to fit the sound
capabilities of the connected Home Theatre System.
• Stereo: If your audio playback devices have no
multichannel sound processing, select to only output
stereo content to your audio playback devices.
• Multichannel: Select to only output 5.1 audio content
(compressed multichannel sound signal) to your
audio playback devices.
• Multichannel (bypass): Select to output Dolby
Digital Plus or DTS content to your audio playback
devices or Home theatre system.
- Make sure your audio playback devices support
Dolby Atmos feature.
- SPDIF output (DIGITAL AUDIO OUT) will be
disabled when streaming Dolby Digital Plus content.
Digital out levelling
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Sound > Advanced > Digital out
levelling.
Adjust the loudness level from device which is
connected to digital audio output (SPDIF) or HDMI.
• Select More to have louder volume.
• Select Less to have softer volume.
Digital out delay
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Sound > Advanced > Digital out delay.
For some Home Theatre Systems you might need to
adjust the audio sync delay to synchronise the audio
to the video. Select Off if a sound delay is set on
your Home Theatre System.
Digital out offset (Only available when Digital out
delay set to On)
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Sound > Advanced > Digital out
offset.
If you cannot set a delay on the Home Theatre
System, you can set the TV to sync the sound. You
can set an offset that compensates for the time
necessary for the Home Theatre System to process
the sound of the TV picture. You can set the value in
steps of 5ms. Maximum setting is 60ms.
TV placement
(TV menu) > Settings > Sound > TV
placement.
Select On a TV stand or On the wall to have best
sound reproduction according to the setting.
13.3
Ambilight Settings
Turn Ambilight On or Off
Turn off Ambilight
Press AMBILIGHT and select Off, or you can
turn Off by pressing (TV
menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight
style > Off.
Ambilight Style
You can select the way Ambilight follows.
(TV
menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight
style.
Follow Video
(TV
menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight
style > Follow video.
Select one of the styles that follow the dynamics of
the picture on your TV screen.
• Standard - Ideal for day to day TV watching
• Natural - Follows the picture or sound as truthful
as possible
• Immersive - Ideal for action movies
• Vivid - Ideal for daylight conditions
• Game - Ideal for gaming
• Comfort - Ideal for a quiet evening
• Relax - Ideal for a lounge feeling
49
Follow Audio
(TV
menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight
style > Follow audio.
Select one of the styles that follow the dynamics of
the sound.
• Lumina - Mixes audio dynamics with video colours
• Colora - Based on audio dynamics
• Retro - Based on audio dynamics
• Spectrum - Based on audio dynamics
• Scanner - Based on audio dynamics
• Rhytm - Based on audio dynamics
• Party - A mix of all Follow Audio styles, one after
the other
Follow Colour
(TV
menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight
style > Follow colour.
Select one of the preset colour styles.
• Hot lava - Red colour variations
• Deep water - Blue colour variations
• Fresh nature - Green colour variations
• warm white - Static colour
• Cool white - Static colour
Follow App
(TV
menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight
style > Follow app.
This function is available when you control Ambilight
with an app.
Ambilight Brightness, Saturation
Brightness
(TV
menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Brightness.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to set the
level of Ambilight brightness.
Saturation
(TV
menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Saturation.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to set the
level of Ambilight saturation.
Ambilight + Hue
Configure
(TV
menu) > Settings > Ambilight >
Ambilight+hue > Configure.
Switch Off
Switch off Ambilight+hue
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Switch
off.
Immersion
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Immersio
n.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust
how accurate the Hue bulbs follow the Ambilight.
Lounge Light+hue
If you installed Ambilight+hue, you can let the hue
bulbs follow Lounge Light from Ambilight. The Philips
hue lamps will expand the Lounge Light effect across
the room.
Switch on/off the hue bulbs
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Lounge
light+hue.
View Configuration or Reset
View current setup of the Ambilight+hue, network,
Bridge and bulbs
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > View
configuration.
Reset current setup of the Ambilight+hue
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Ambilight > Ambilight+hue > Reset
configuration.
50
Advanced Ambilight Settings
Neutralise the influence of a coloured wall on the
Ambilight colours
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Ambilight > Advanced > Wall colour.
Select the colour of the wall behind the TV and the TV
will modify the Ambilight colours to appear as they
are intended.
ISF Tuning
(TV
menu) >
Settings > Ambilight > Advanced > ISF tuning.
Set Ambilight to switch off immediately or slowly
fade out when you switch off the TV
(TV
menu) > Settings > Ambilight > Advanced >
TV switch off.
13.4
Eco Settings
Set energy saving level
(TV menu) > Settings > Eco
settings > Energy saving.
Select Maximum, Medium, or Minimum to have
different degress for energy saving, or select Off to
switch off energy saving mode.
Set screen off to save energy consumption
(TV menu) > Settings > Eco
settings > Screen off.
Select Screen off, the TV screen is switched off, to
switch the TV screen back on, press any key on the
remote control.
Switch on built-in ambient light sensor
(TV menu) > Settings > Eco
settings > Light sensor.
Select Light sensor, the built-in ambient light sensor
lowers the brightness of the TV screen when the
surrounding light darkens. The built-in light sensor
automatically adjusts the picture, to the lighting
conditions of the room.
Set TV switch off timer
(TV menu) > Settings > Eco
settings > Switch off timer.
Press the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the
value. The value 0 (Off) deactivates the automatic
switch off.
Select Switch off timer, the TV switches off
automatically to save energy.
* TV switches off if receiving a TV signal but you don't
press a key on the remote control during a 4 hour
period.
* TV switches off if not receivING a TV signal nor a
remote control command for 10 minutes.
* If you use the TV as a monitor or use a digital
receiver to watch TV (a Set-Top Box - STB) and you
do not use the remote control of the TV, you should
deactivate this automatic switch off, to set the value
to 0.
13.5
General Settings
EasyLink - HDMI CEC
Connect HDMI CEC-compatible devices to your TV,
you can operate them with the TV remote control.
EasyLink HDMI CEC must be switched on on the TV
and the connected device.
Switch on EasyLink
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > EasyLink > EasyLink > On.
Operate HDMI CEC-compatible devices with TV
remote control
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > EasyLink > EasyLink remote
control > On.
Note:
• EasyLink might not work with devices from other
brands.
• The HDMI CEC functionality has different names on
different brands. Some examples are: Anynet, Aquos
Link, Bravia Theatre Sync, Kuro Link, Simplink and
Viera Link. Not all brands are fully compatible with
EasyLink. Example HDMI CEC branding names are
51
property of their respective owners.
HDMI Ultra HD
Connect the HDMI device and play Ultra HD signal on
your TV, might not work correctly or show distorted
picture or sound. To avoid the malfunctioning of such
a device, you can set the signal quality to a level the
device can handle.
Set the signal quality for each HDMI connectors
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > HDMI Ultra HD > HDMI 1&2 > UHD
4:2:0, UHD 4:4:4/4:2:2.
The setting UHD 4:4:4/4:2:2 allows UHD YCbCr 4:4:4
/ 4:2:2 signals. The setting UHD 4:2:0 allows UHD
YCbCr 4:2:0 signals.
If the device is not using Ultra HD signals, you can
switch off Ultra HD for this HDMI connection.
Set the signal quality for each HDMI connectors
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > HDMI Ultra HD > HDMI 1&2 > UHD Off.
USB Hard Drive
You need to set up and format a USB Hard Drive
before you record a channel.
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > USB Hard Drive.
Before you can pause or record a broadcast, or store
apps, you must connect and format a USB Hard
Drive. Formatting removes all files from the USB Hard
Drive. If you want to record broadcasts with TV Guide
data from the Internet, you must setup the Internet
connection first before you install the USB Hard Drive.
Warning
The USB Hard Drive is formatted exclusively for this
TV, you cannot use the stored recordings on another
TV or PC. Do not copy or change recording files on
the USB Hard Drive with any PC application. This will
corrupt your recordings. When you format another
USB Hard Drive, the content on the former will be lost.
A USB Hard Drive installed on your TV will need
reformatting for use with a computer.
To format a USB Hard Drive…
1 - Connect the USB Hard Drive to one of
the USB connections on the TV. Do not connect
another USB device to the other USB ports when
formatting.
2 - Switch on the USB Hard Drive and the TV.
3 - Select Recordings if you want to perform Pause
TV and Recordings, otherwise, select Apps to store
apps. Follow the instructions on screen.
4 - All files and data will be removed after formatting.
5 - When the USB Hard Drive is formatted, leave it
connected permanently.
USB Keyboard Settings
Set the keyboard layout for installed USB keyboard
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > USB keyboard settings.
Connect the USB keyboard to one of the USB
connections on this TV. When the TV detects the
keyboard for the first time, you can select your
keyboard lay-out and test your selection.
CAM Profile Name
Set profile name for installed CI+/CAM
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > CAM profile name.
HbbTV Settings - Hybrid Broadcast
Broadband TV
Switch on HbbTV
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > Advanced > HbbTV settings > HbbTV
> On.
Switch off HbbTV History Tracking
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > Advanced > HbbTV settings > HbbTV
tracking > Off.
Remove HbbTV Cookies
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > Advanced > HbbTV settings > HbbTV
cookies > On.
Home or Shop
Select the location of your TV
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > Location.
Select Shop, the picture style is switched back
to Vivid, and can adjust shop settings.
52
Shop mode is for in-store promotion.
Adjust shop settings
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > Shop setup.
TV Guide
The TV Guide receives information (data) from
broadcasters or from the Internet. The TV can collect
TV Guide information for the channels that are
installed on the TV.
Select where the TV guide data receives from
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > Advanced > TV guide.
Note:
• In some regions and for some channels, TV guide
information might not be available.
• The TV cannot collect the TV guide information from
channels viewed from a digital receiver or decoder.
Channel Logos
Switch off channel logos
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > Advanced > Channel logos.
Reset TV Settings and Reinstall TV
Reset all settings value to original TV settings
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > Factory settings.
Redo full TV installation , and set TV status back to
the first time you switch on
(TV menu) > Settings > General
settings > Reinstall TV.
Enter PIN code and select Yes, the TV will reinstall
completely.
All settings will be reset and installed channels will be
replaced.
The installation can take a few minute
13.6
Clock, Region, and Language
Settings
Language
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Language.
Change the language of the TV menu and
messages
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Language > Menu language.
Set audio preference language
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Language > Primary audio, Secondary
audio.
Digital TV channels can broadcast audio with several
spoken languages for a programme. You can set a
preferred primary and secondary audio language. If
audio in one of these languages is available, the TV
will switch to this audio.
Set subtitle preference language
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Language > Primary
subtitle, Secondary subtitle.
Digital channels can offer several subtitle languages
for a programme. You can set a preferred primary and
secondary subtitle language. If subtitles in one of
these languages are available, the TV will show the
subtitles you selected.
Set teletex preference language
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Language > Primary text, Secondary
text.
Some digital TV broadcasters have several Text
languages available.
Clock
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Clock.
Correct clock automatically
53
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Clock > Auto clock mode.
• The standard setting for the TV clock is Automatic.
The time information comes from the broadcasted
UTC - Coordinated Universal Time information.
• If the clock is not correct, you can set the TV clock
to Country dependent.
Correct clock manually
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Clock > Auto clock mode > Manual.
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Clock > Date, Time.
Go to previous menu, and select Date and Time to
adjust the value.
Note:
• If none of the automatic settings display the time
correctly, you can set the time manually.
• If you schedule recordings from the TV Guide, we
recommend not to change the time and date
manually.
Set time zone or set a time offset for your region
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Clock > Time zone.
Set the TV to switch to Standby automatically after a
preset time
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Clock > Sleep timer.
Remote Control Keyboard
(TV menu) > Settings > Region and
language > Remote control keyboard
To set the keyboard layout to Azerty.
13.7
Android Settings
(TV menu) > Settings > Android settings.
View the list of installed Apps, check out the free
space to download more or uninstall an App.
13.8
Universal Access Settings
(TV menu) > Settings > Universal access.
With Universal Access switched on, the TV is
prepared for use for the deaf, hard of hearing, blind or
partially sighted people.
Switch on universal access settings
(TV menu) > Settings > Universal
access > Universal access > On.
Universal access for hearing impaired people
(TV menu) > Settings > Universal
access > Hearing impaired > On.
• Some digital TV channels broadcast special audio
and subtitles adapted for the hard of hearing or deaf
people.
• Switched on, the TV automatically switches to the
adapted audio and subtitles, if available.
Universal access for blind or partially sighted
people
(TV menu) > Settings > Universal
access > Audio description > Audio description >
On.
Digital TV channels can broadcast special audio
commentary describing what is happening on
screen.
(TV menu) > Settings > Universal
access > Audio description > Mixed volume, Audio
effects, Speech.
• Select Mixed volume, you can mix the volume of
the normal audio with the audio commentary. Press
the arrows (up) or (down) to adjust the value.
• Set Audio effect to On for extra audio effects in
the commentary audio, like stereo or fading sound.
• Select Speech to set speech
preference, Descriptive or Subtitles.
13.9
Lock Settings
54
Set Code and Change Code
Set new code or reset change code
(TV menu) > Settings > Child lock > Set
code, Change code.
The child lock code is used to lock or unlock channels
or programmes.
Note:
If you forgot your PIN code, you can override the
current code use 8888 and enter a new code.
Lock for Programme
Set a minumum age to watch rated programmes
(TV menu) > Settings > Child
lock > Parental rating.
Lock for App
Set lock on App Gallery apps
(TV menu) > Settings > Child lock > App
lock.
You can lock apps unsuited for children. You can lock
18+ rated apps from the App Gallery or set up a
restricted profile in the Home menu.
18+
The 18+ app lock will ask for a PIN code when you try
to start an 18+ rated app. This lock is only valid for 18+
rated apps from the Philips App Gallery.
Restricted profile
You can set up a restructed profile for the Home
menu where only the apps you allow are available.
You need to enter a PIN code to set up and switch on
the restricted profile.
Google Play Store - Maturity
In the Google Play Store, you can hide apps
according to users/buyers maturity. You need to enter
a PIN code to select or change the level of maturity.
The level of maturity will determine which apps are
available for instalation.
Lock for CAM
Set CAM PIN for recording
(TV menu) > Settings > Child lock > CAM
PIN.
55
14
Videos, Photos and
Music
14.1
From a Computer or NAS
You can view your photos or play your music and
videos from a computer or a NAS (Network Attached
Storage) in your home network.
The TV and computer or NAS must be in the same
home network. On your computer or NAS, you need
to install Media Server Software. Your Media Server
must be set to share your files with the TV. The TV
shows your files and folders as they are organised by
the Media Server or as they are structured on your
computer or NAS.
The TV does not support subtitles on video streams
from a computer or NAS.
If the Media Server supports searching for files, a
search field is available.
To browse and play the files on your computer…
1 - Press SOURCES, select Network and
press OK.
2 - Select SimplyShare Devices and
press (right) to select the device you need.
3 - You can browse and play your files.
4 - To stop playing videos, photos and music,
press EXIT.
14.2
Favourites Menu
Add a folder or a file to favourites menu
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and select a folder or a
file.
3 - Press Mark favourite (green) to add the
selected folder or file to the favourite menu.
View favourite files
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and
select Favourites.
3 - You can view all favourite files in the list.
14.3
Most Popular Menu and Last
Played Menu
View most popular files or clear the list
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and select Most
popular.
3 - Select one of the file and press OK to view files
or press Clear all to clear the list.
View last played files
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and select Last
played.
3 - Select one of the file and press OK to view
files or press Clear all to clear the list.
14.4
From a USB Connection
You can view your photos or play your music and
videos from a connected USB flash drive or USB Hard
Drive.
With the TV switched on, plug in a USB flash drive or a
USB Hard Drive to one of the USB connections. The
TV detects the device and will list your media files.
If the list of files does not appear automatically…
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to
select the USB device you need.
3 - You can browse your files in the folder structure
you have organised on the drive.
4 - Press Play all to play all files in the USB
folder or press Mark favourite to add the selected
folder to favourite menu - Favourites.
5 - To stop playing videos, photos and music,
press EXIT.
Warning
If you try to pause or record a programme with a USB
Hard Drive connected, the TV will ask you to format
the USB Hard Drive. This formatting will delete all
current files on the USB Hard Drive.
56
14.5
Play your Videos
Play Videos
Open video folder
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to
select the USB device you need.
3 - Select Videos, you can press Mark
favourite to add the video folder to favourite menu
- Favourites.
Play a video
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to
select the USB device you need.
3 - Select Videos and select one of video, you
can press Play all to play all files in the folder or
press Mark as favourite to add the selected
video to favourite menu - Favourites.
Control bar
To show or hide the control bar when a video is
playing, press INFO*.
1 - Progress bar
2 - Playback control bar
- : Jump to the previous video in a folder
- : Jump to the next video in a folder
-  : Rewind
-  : Fast forward
-  : Pause the playback
3 - Mark as favourites
4 - Play all videos
5 - Subtitle: switch subtitles On, Off or On During
Mute.
6 - Subtitle language: select a Subtitle Language
7 - Audio language: select an audio language
8 - Shuffle: play your files in a random order
9 - Repeat: plays all videos in this folder once or
continuously
* If INFO key is available on your remote control
Video Options
Browse video files...
• List/Thumbnails – List or thumbnails views
• Shuffle – Play your files in a random order
• Repeat – Plays all videos in this folder once or
continuously
• Info – Show video information
Playing video files...
• Mark as favourites – Mark the video as favourites
• Subtitle setting – Set subtitle font size, colour,
position...etc
• Info – Show video information
14.6
View your Photos
View Photos
Open photo folder
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to
select the USB device you need.
3 - Select Photos, you can press Mark
favourite to add the photo folder to favourite menu
- Favourites or press Sort for quickly
finding a photo.
View a photo
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to
select the USB device you need.
3 - Select Photos and select one of photos, you
can press Slide show to play all files in the
folder or press Mark favourite to add the
selected photo to favourite menu - Favourites.
Control bar
57
1 - Playback control bar
- : Jump to the previous photo in a folder
- : Jump to the next photo in a folder
-  : Pause the slideshow playback
2 - Mark as favourites
3 - Start a slideshow
4 - Rotate the photo
5 - Shuffle: play your files in a random order
6 - Repeat: plays all photos in this folder once or
continuously
7 - Stop the music playing in the background
8 - Set the speed of the slide show
Photo Options
Browse photo files...
• List/Thumbnails – List or thumbnails views
• Shuffle – Play your files in a random order
• Repeat – Play the slide show once or continuously
• Slide Show Speed – Set the speed of the slide
show
Playing photo files...
• Mark as favourites – Mark the photo as favourites
• Info – Show video information
14.7
Play your Music
Play Music
Open photo folder
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to
select the USB device you need.
3 - Select Music, you can press Mark
favourite to add the music folder to favourite menu
- Favourites.
4 - You can quickly find a music using classification
- Genres, Artists, Albums, Tracks.
Play music
1 - Press SOURCES, select USB and
press OK.
2 - Select USB Devices and press (right) to
select the USB device you need.
3 - Select Music and select one of classifications to
view music files.
4 - Select a music and you can press Play
all to play all files in the folder or press Mark
favourite to add the selected music to favourite
menu - Favourites.
Control bar
1 - Progress bar
2 - Playback control bar
- : Jump to the previous music in a folder
- : Jump to the next music in a folder
-  : Rewind
-  : Fast forward
-  : Pause the playback
3 - Mark as favourites
4 - Play all music
5 - Shuffle: play your files in a random order
6 - Repeat: plays all music in this folder once or
continuously
Music Options
Browse music files...
• Shuffle – Play your files in a random order.
• Repeat – Plays all songs in this folder once or
continuously.
Playing music files...
• Mark as favourites – Mark the music as favourites
58
• Info – Show music information
59
15
TV Guide
15.1
What You Need
With the TV Guide you can view a list of the current
and scheduled TV programmes of your channels.
Depending on where the TV guide information (data)
is coming from, analogue and digital channels or only
digital channels are shown. Not all channels offer TV
Guide information.
The TV can collect TV Guide information for the
channels that are installed on the TV. The TV cannot
collect the TV Guide information for channels viewed
from a digital receiver or decoder.
15.2
TV Guide Data
The TV Guide receives information (data) from
broadcasters or from the Internet. In some regions
and for some channels, TV Guide information might
not be available. The TV can collect TV Guide
information for the channels that are installed on the
TV. The TV cannot collect the TV Guide information
from channels viewed from a digital receiver or
decoder.
The TV comes with the information set to From the
Broadcaster.
If TV Guide information comes from the Internet, the
TV Guide can also list analogue channels next to the
digital channels. The TV Guide menu also shows a
small screen with the current channel.
From the Internet
If the TV is connected to the Internet, you can set the
TV to receive the TV Guide information from the
Internet.
To set the TV Guide information…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select General Settings and press (right) to
enter the menu.
3 - Select Advanced > TV Guide > From the
Internet and press OK.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
Missing recordings
When some recordings seem to have disappeared
from the list of recordings, the TV Guide info (data)
might have changed. Recordings made with the
setting From the Broadcaster become invisible in
the list if you switch the setting to From the
Internet or vice versa. The TV might have switched
to From the Internet automatically.
To make the recordings available in the list of
recordings, switch to the setting that was selected
when the recordings were made.
15.3
Using the TV Guide
Open the TV Guide
To open the TV Guide, press TV GUIDE. The TV
Guide shows the channels of the selected tuner.
Press TV GUIDE again to close.
The first time you open the TV Guide, the TV scans all
TV channels for programme information. This may
take several minutes. TV Guide data is stored on TV.
Tune to a Programme
From the TV Guide, you can tune to a current
programme.
To switch to the programme (channel), select the
programme and press OK.
View programme details
To call up the details of the selected programme…
1 - Press INFO.
2 - Press BACK to close.
Change Day
The TV Guide can show the scheduled programmes
for the upcoming days (maximum up to 8 days).
Press the colour key Day and select the day you
need.
Set a Reminder
You can set a reminder for a programme. A message
will alert you at the start of the programme. You can
tune to this channel immediately.
In the TV Guide a programme with a reminder is
marked with a (clock).
To set a reminder…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select an upcoming
programme.
2 - Press the colour key Set Reminder and press
OK.
3 - Press BACK to close the menu.
60
To clear a reminder…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select a programme
with the reminder.
2 - Press the colour key Clear Reminder and
press OK.
3 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Search by Genre
If the information is available, you can look up
scheduled programmes by genre like movies, sports,
etc.
To search for programmes by genre…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press OPTIONS.
3 - Select Search by Genre and press OK.
4 - Select the genre you want and press OK. A list
with the found programmes appears.
5 - You can set reminders or schedule a recording on
a selected programme.
6 - Press BACK to close the menu.
For more information on Recording, press the colour
key Keywords and look up Recording.
* Not available when selecting DVB-S channel
List of Reminders
You can view a list of the reminders you have set.
List of Reminders
To open the list of reminders…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - At the top of the screen,
select Scheduled and press OK.
4 - In the list of scheduled recordings and reminders,
select the tab Reminders and press OK to view the
reminders only.
5 - Press the colour key Remove to remove the
selected reminder. Press the colour
key Record to record the selected programme.
6 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Set a Recording
You can set a recording in the TV Guide*.
To see the recording list, press Recordings , a
programme set to be recorded is marked with
a (red dot) on the front of the programme name.
To record a programme…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select a future or
ongoing programme.
2 - Press the colour key Record .
3 - Press BACK to close the menu.
To cancel a recording…
1 - Press TV GUIDE and select the programme
set for recording.
2 - Press the colour key Clear Recording .
3 - Press BACK to close the menu.
* See chapter Recording and Pause TV for more
information.
61
16
Recording and
Pause TV
16.1
Recording
What You Need
You can record a digital TV broadcast and watch it
later.
To record a TV programme you need…
• a connected USB Hard Drive formatted on this TV
• digital TV channels installed on this TV
• to receive channel information for the on screen TV
Guide
• a reliable TV clock setting. If you reset the TV clock
manually, recordings may fail.
You cannot record when you are using Pause TV.
In terms enforcement of copyright legislation, some
DVB providers can apply different restriction by
means of DRM (Digital Right Management)
technology. In case of broadcasting protected
channels, recording, record validity or number of
views may be restricted. Recording may be
completely prohibited. In case of trying to record a
protected broadcasting or play back an expired
recording, an error message can appear.
For more information on installing a USB Hard Drive,
in Help, press the colour key Keywords and
look up USB Hard Drive, installation.
Record a Programme
Record Now
To record the programme you are watching right now,
press (Record) on the remote control. The
recording will start immediately.
To stop the recording, press (Stop).
When TV Guide data is available, the programme you
are watching will be recorded from the moment you
pressed the recording key until the programme
ends. If no TV Guide data is available, the recording
will only last 30 minutes. You can adjust the end time
of the recording in the list of Recordings.
Schedule a Recording
You can schedule a recording of an upcoming
programme for today or a few days from today
(maximum of 8 days away). The TV will use the data
from the TV Guide to start and end the recording.
To record a programme…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - On the TV Guide, select the channel and
programme you wish to record. Press (right)
or (left) to scroll through the programmes of a
channel. Use the colour key Day to select the
day you need.
3 - With the programme highlighted, press the colour
key Record . The programme is scheduled for
recording. A warning will show automatically when
overlapping recordings are scheduled. If you plan to
record a programme in your absence, remember to
leave the TV switched to Standby and the USB Hard
Drive switched on.
4 - The TV adds some time margin at the end of the
programme. You can adjust this margin with Auto
End Margin.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
List of Recordings
You can view and manage your recordings in the list
of recordings. Next to the list of recordings, there is a
separate list for scheduled recordings and reminders.
To open the list or recordings…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - In the list of recordings, select the
tabs New, Watched or Expired and press OK to
filter your view.
4 - With a recording selected in the list, you can
remove the recording with the colour
key Remove or stop an ongoing recording
with the colour key Stop Recording . You can
rename a recording with the colour key Rename .
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Broadcasters can limit the number of days a recording
can be viewed. When this period expires, the
recording will be marked as expired. A recording in
the list can show the number of days before it expires.
When a scheduled recording was prevented by the
broadcaster or when the broadcast was interrupted, a
recording is marked as Failed.
Recording Conflicts
When two scheduled recordings are overlapping in
time, there is a recording conflict. To solve a recording
conflict, you can adjust the start and end time of one
62
or both scheduled recordings.
To adjust the start or end time of a scheduled
recording…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - At the top of the screen,
select Scheduled and press OK.
4 - In the list of scheduled recordings and reminders,
select the tab Recordings and press OK to view
the scheduled recordings only.
5 - Select the scheduled recording that conflicts with
another scheduled recording and press the colour
key Adjust Time .
6 - Select the start or end time and change the time
with the (up) or (down) keys.
Select Apply and press OK.
7 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Auto End Margin
You can set the time margin that the TV will add
automatically at the end of each scheduled recording.
To set the automatic end time margin…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - Press OPTIONS and select Auto End
Margin and press OK.
4 - Press (up) or (down) and press OK to
set the time margin added to a recording
automatically. You can add up to 45 minutes to a
recording.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
Manual Recording
You can schedule a recording that is not linked to a
TV programme. You set the tuner type, channel and
the start and end time yourself.
To schedule a recording manually…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - At the top of the screen,
select Scheduled and press OK.
4 - Press OPTIONS, select Schedule and
press OK.
5 - Select the tuner from where you want to record
and press OK.
6 - Select the channel to record from and press OK.
7 - Select the day of the recording and press OK.
8 - Set the start and end time of the recording. Select
a button and use the (up) or (down) keys to
set the hours and minutes.
9 - Select Record and press OK to schedule the
manual recording.
The recording will appear in the list of scheduled
recordings and reminders.
Watch a Recording
To watch a recording…
1 - Press TV GUIDE.
2 - Press the colour key Recordings .
3 - In the list of recordings, select the recording you
need and press OK to start watching.
4 - You can use the
keys (pause), (play), (rewind), (fast
forward) or (stop).
5 - To switch back to watch TV, press EXIT.
16.2
Pause TV
What You Need
You can pause a digital TV broadcast and resume
watching it a bit later.
To pause a TV programme you need…
• a connected USB Hard Drive formatted on this TV
• digital TV channels installed on this TV
• to receive channel information for the on screen TV
Guide
With the USB Hard Drive connected and formatted,
the TV continuously stores the TV broadcast you are
watching. When you switch to another channel, the
broadcast of the former channel is cleared. Also
when you switch the TV to standby the broadcast is
cleared.
You cannot use Pause TV when you are recording.
For more information, in Help, press the colour
key Keywords and look up USB Hard Drive,
installation.
Pause a Programme
To pause and resume a broadcast…
• To pause a broadcast, press (Pause). A progress
bar at the bottom of the screen appears briefly.
• To call up the progress bar, press (Pause) again.
• To resume watching, press (Play).
With the progress bar on screen, press (Rewind)
or press (Forward) to select from where you want
to start viewing the paused broadcast. Press these
keys repeatedly to change speed.
You can pause a broadcast for a maximum time span
of 90 minutes.
To switch back to the live TV broadcast,
63
press (Stop).
Replay
Since the TV stores the broadcast you are watching,
you can mostly replay the broadcast for a few
seconds.
To replay a current broadcast…
1 - Press (Pause)
2 - Press (Rewind). You can
press repeatedly to select from where you want
to start viewing the paused broadcast. Press these
keys repeatedly to change speed. At one point you
will reach the start of the broadcast storage or the
maximum time span.
3 - Press (Play) to watch the broadcast again.
4 - Press (Stop) to watch the broadcast live.
64
17
Smartphones and
Tablets
17.1
Philips TV Remote App
The new Philips TV Remote App on your smartphone
or tablet is your new TV buddy.
With the TV Remote App, you master your media
around you. Send photos, music or videos to your big
TV screen or watch any of your TV channels live on
your tablet or phone. Look up what you want to
watch on the TV Guide and watch it on your phone or
TV. With the TV Remote App you can use your phone
as a remote control.
Download the Philips TV Remote App from your
favourite app store today.
The Philips TV Remote App is available for iOS and
Android and is free of charge.
17.2
Google Cast
What You Need
If an app on your mobile device has Google Cast, you
can cast your app on this TV. On the mobile app, look
for the Google Cast icon. You can use your mobile
device to control what's on TV. Google Cast works on
Android and iOS.
Your mobile device must be connected to the same
Wi-Fi home network as your TV.
Apps with Google Cast
New Google Cast apps come available every
day. You can already try it with YouTube, Chrome,
Netflix, Photowall … or Big Web Quiz for
Chromecast. See also google.com/cast
Some Google Play products and features aren't
available in all countries.
Find more information
on support.google.com/androidtv
Cast to Your TV
To cast an app to the TV screen…
1 - On your smartphone or tablet, open an app that
supports Google Cast.
2 - Tab the Google Cast icon.
3 - Select the TV you would like to cast to.
4 - Press play on your smartphone or tablet. What
you selected should start playing on TV.
17.3
AirPlay
To add the AirPlay functionality to your Android TV,
you can download and install one of the several
Android apps that do just that. You can find several of
these apps in the Google Play Store.
17.4
MHL
This TV is MHL™ compliant.
If your mobile device is also MHL compliant, you can
connect your mobile device with a MHL cable to the
TV. With the MHL cable connected you can share
what's on your mobile device on the TV screen. Your
mobile device charges its battery at the same time.
The MHL connection is ideal for watching movies or
playing games from your mobile device on TV for a
longer time.
Charging
With the MHL cable connected, your device will
charge while the TV is switched on (not in standby).
MHL Cable
You need a passive MHL cable (HDMI to Micro USB)
to connect your mobile device to the TV. You might
need an extra adapter to connect to your mobile
device. To connect the MHL cable to the TV use
the HDMI 1 MHL connection.
MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL,
LLC.
65
18
Top Picks
18.1
About Top Picks
With Top Picks your TV recommends…
• current TV programmes in Now on TV
• online TV services (Catch Up TV) in TV on Demand
• the latest rental videos in Video on Demand
• online TV services (Catch Up TV) from Freeview in
Freeview Play
To enjoy Top Picks, connect your TV to the
Internet. Make sure you agree to the Terms of Use.
The Top Picks information and services are only
available in selected countries.
Terms of Use
To allow the TV to make these recommendations, you
must agree to the Terms of Use. To get personalised
recommendations based on your viewing habits,
make sure you checked the box for Personalized
Recommendations Service Opt-In.
To open the Terms of Use…
1 - Press TOP PICKS.
2 - Press OPTIONS, select Terms of Use and
press OK.
3 - Select Privacy Settings and press OK.
4 - Select Personalized Recommendations Service
Opt-In and press OK to check the box.
Press OK again to uncheck.
5 - Press BACK to close the menu.
18.2
Now on TV
About Now on TV
With Now on TV , the TV recommends the 10
most popular programmes to watch at this moment.
The TV recommends programmes on TV now or
starting within 15 minutes. The recommended
programmes are selected from the channels you
installed. The selection is made from channels of your
country. Also, you can let Now on TV do some
personalised recommendations for you, based on
programmes you watch regularly.
To make the Now on TV information available…
• the Now on TV information must be available in your
country.
• the TV must have channels installed.
• the TV must be connected to the Internet.
• the TV Clock must be set to Automatic or Country
Dependent.
• you must accept the Terms of Use (You might have
accepted already when you connected to the
Internet.).
The icon will only appear at the top of the screen
when Now on TV is available.
The TV does not store former recommendations.
Using Now on TV
To open Now on TV…
1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks
menu.
2 - Select Now on TV at the top of the screen
and press OK.
3 - Press BACK to close.
When you open Now on TV, the TV may need a few
seconds to refresh the page information.
In Now on TV you can…
• select and press OK on a programme icon to tune
to the ongoing programme.
• select and press OK on a scheduled programme
icon to tune to the channel already.
You can use the colour keys on the remote control to
start, stop or clear a scheduled recording. You can
also set or remove a reminder that warns you when a
programme starts.
To leave Now on TV without tuning to another
channel, press BACK.
18.3
TV on Demand
About TV on Demand
With TV on Demand , you can watch TV
programmes you missed or watch your favourite
programmes whenever it suits you best. This service is
also called Catch Up TV, Replay TV or Online TV.
Programmes available on TV on Demand are free to
watch.
You can let TV on Demand do some personalised
recommendations of programmes, based on the TV
installation and the programmes you watch regularly.
The icon will only appear at the top of the screen
when TV on Demand is available.
66
Using TV on Demand
To open TV on Demand…
1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks
menu.
2 - Select TV on Demand at the top of the
screen and press OK.
3 - Press (down) to open the page full screen.
4 - You can select a specific broadcaster if more than
one is available.
5 - Select a programme icon and press OK to start
watching.
6 - Press BACK to close.
When you open TV on Demand, the TV may need a
few seconds to refresh the page information.
Once a programme started, you can use
the (Play) and (Pause) keys.
18.4
Video on Demand
About Video on Demand
With Video on Demand , you can rent movies
from an online rental video store.
You can let Video on Demand do some personalised
recommendations of movies, based on your country,
the TV installation and the programmes you watch
regularly.
The icon will only appear at the top of the screen
when Video on Demand is available.
Payment
When you rent or buy a movie, you can pay the video
store securely with your credit card. Most video
stores ask you to create a login account the first time
you rent a movie.
Internet Traffic
Streaming a lot of videos may cause you to exceed
your monthly Internet traffic limit.
Using Video on Demand
To open Video on Demand…
1 - Press TOP PICKS to open the Top Picks
menu.
2 - Select Video on Demand at the top of the
screen and press OK.
3 - Use the navigation keys to select a movie poster.
4 - Press BACK to close.
When you open Video on Demand, the TV may need
a few seconds to refresh the page information.
You can select a specific video store if more than one
is available.
To rent a movie…
1 - Navigate the highlight on a movie poster. Limited
info will show after some seconds.
2 - Press OK to open the movie page of the video
store for a synopsis of the movie.
3 - Confirm your order.
4 - Make the payment on TV.
5 - Start watching. You can use the (Play)
and (Pause) keys.
67
19
Home Menu
19.1
Open the Home Menu
To open the Home menu and open an item…
1 - Press HOME.
2 - Select an item and press OK to open or start it.
3 - Press BACK to close the Home menu
without starting anything.
19.2
Restricted Profile
You can restrict the use of certain apps by switching
the TV to a restricted profile. This restricted profile will
only allow the use of apps which you have selected.
You can only switch out of this profile with a PIN
code.
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you
cannot…
• Find or open apps which are marked as Not allowed
• Access the Google Play Store
• Purchase through Google Play Movies & TV, nor
Google Play Games
• Use third-party apps that don't use the Google sign-
in
With the TV switched to a restricted profile you can…
• Watch content already rented or purchased from
Google Play Movies & TV
• Play games already purchased and installed from
Google Play Games
• Access the following settings: Wi-Fi network, Speech
and Accessibility
• Add Bluetooth accessories
The Google Account on TV will stay logged in. Using a
restricted profile doesn't change the Google Account.
68
20
Netflix
If you have a Netflix membership subscription, you
can enjoy Netflix on this TV. Your TV must be
connected to the Internet. In your region, Netflix
might only come available with future software
updates.
To open Netflix, press to open the Netflix
App. You can open Netflix immediately from a TV in
standby.
www.netflix.com
69
21
Software
21.1
Update Software
Update from Internet
If the TV is connected to the Internet, you may receive
a message to update the TV software. You need a
high-speed (broadband) Internet connection. If you
receive this message, we recommend you to carry out
the update.
With the message on screen, select Update and
follow the instructions on-screen.
You can also look for a software update yourself.
During the software update, there is no picture and
the TV will switch off and on again. This might happen
several times. The update can take a few minutes.
Wait until the TV picture comes back up. Do not press
the power switch on the TV or on the remote
control during the software update.
To look for a software update yourself…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Update Software > Search for
Updates and press OK.
3 - Select Internet and press OK.
4 - The TV will look for an update on the Internet.
5 - If an update is available, you can update the
software right away.
6 - A software update can take several minutes. Do
not press the key on the TV or remote control.
7 - When the update is done, the TV will return to the
channel you were watching.
Update from USB
It might be necessary to update the TV software.
You need a computer with an high-speed Internet
connection and a USB flash drive to upload the
software on the TV. Use a USB flash drive with at least
2Gb free space. Make sure that write protection is
switched off.
To update the TV software…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Update Software > Search for
Updates and press OK.
3 - Select USB and press OK.
Identify the TV
1 - Insert the USB flash drive into one of the USB
connections of the TV.
2 - Select Write to USB and press OK. An
identification file is written on the USB flash drive.
Download the software
1 - Insert the USB flash drive into your computer.
2 - On the USB flash drive, locate the
file update.htm and double click it.
3 - Click Send ID.
4 - If new software is available, download the .zip
file.
5 - After the download, unzip the file and copy the
file autorun.upg onto the USB flash drive. Do not
place this file in a folder.
Update the TV software
1 - Insert the USB flash drive into the TV again. The
update starts automatically.
2 - A software update can take several minutes. Do
not press the key on the TV or remote control. Do
not remove the USB flash drive.
3 - When the update is done, the TV will return to the
channel you were watching.
If a power cut occurs during the update, never
remove the USB flash drive from the TV. When the
power returns, the update will continue.
To prevent an accidental update of the TV software,
delete the autorun.upg file from the USB flash drive.
21.2
Software Version
To view the current TV software version…
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Update Software > Current Software
Info and press OK.
3 - The version, release notes and creation date are
shown. Also, the Netflix ESN Number is shown if
available.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
21.3
Automatic Software Update
To switch on Automatic software update to update
your TV software automatically. Leave the TV in
standby.
1 - Press , select All Settings and press OK.
2 - Select Update Software > Automatic Software
Update and press OK.
3 - Follow the on-screen instruction.
4 - Press (left) repeatedly if necessary, to close
the menu.
70
21.4
Open Source Software
This television contains open source software. TP
Vision Europe B.V. hereby offers to deliver, upon
request, a copy of the complete corresponding
source code for the copyrighted open source
software packages used in this product for which such
offer is requested by the respective licences.
This offer is valid up to three years after product
purchase to anyone in receipt of this information.
To obtain the source code, please write in English to .
. .
open.source@tpvision.com
21.5
Open Source License
About Open Source License
README for the source code of the parts of TP Vision
Netherlands B.V. TV software that fall under open
source licenses.
This is a document describing the distribution of the
source code used on the TP Vision Netherlands B.V.
TV, which fall either under the GNU General Public
License (the GPL), or the GNU Lesser General Public
License (the LGPL), or any other open source license.
Instructions to obtain copies of this software can be
found in the Directions For Use.
TP Vision Netherlands B.V. MAKES NO WARRANTIES
WHATSOEVER, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, REGARDING THIS SOFTWARE. TP Vision
Netherlands B.V. offers no support for this software.
The preceding does not affect your warranties and
statutory rights regarding any TP Vision Netherlands
B.V. product(s) you purchased. It only applies to this
source code made available to you.
Open Source
Android (7.1.1)
This tv contains the Android Nougat Software.
Android is a Linux-based operating system designed
primarily for touchscreen mobile devices such as
smartphones and tablet computers. This software will
also be reused in TPVision Android based TV's. The
original download site for this software is
: https://android.googlesource.com/. This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Apache license version 2, which can
be found below. Android APACHE License Version 2
( http://source.android.com/source/licenses.html ).
This includes all external sources used by official
Android AOSP.
linux kernel (3.10.79)
This tv contains the Linux Kernel. The original
download site for this software is
: http://www.kernel.org/ . This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
GPL v2 license, which can be found below.
Additionally, following exception applies: "NOTE! This
copyright does *not* cover user programs that use
kernel services by normal system calls - this is merely
considered normal use of the kernel, and does *not*
fall under the heading of "derived work". Also note
that the GPL below is copyrighted by the Free
Software Foundation, but the instance of code that it
refers to (the linux kernel) is copyrighted by me and
others who actually wrote it. Also note that the only
valid version of the GPL as far as the kernel is
concerned is _this_ particular version of the license (ie
v2, not v2.2 or v3.x or whatever), unless explicitly
otherwise stated. Linus Torvalds"
libcurl (7.50.1)
libcurl is a free and easy-to-use client-side URL
transfer library, supporting DICT, FILE, FTP, FTPS,
Gopher, HTTP, HTTPS, IMAP, IMAPS, LDAP, LDAPS,
POP3, POP3S, RTMP, RTSP, SCP, SFTP, SMTP,
SMTPS, Telnet and TFTP. libcurl supports SSL
certificates, HTTP POST, HTTP PUT, FTP uploading,
HTTP form based upload, proxies, cookies,
user+password authentication (Basic, Digest, NTLM,
Negotiate, Kerberos), file transfer resume, http proxy
tunneling and more! The original download site for
this software is
: http://curl.haxx.se/libcurl/ COPYRIGHT AND
PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright (c) 1996 - 2010,
Daniel Stenberg, daniel@haxx.se. All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software for any purpose with or without fee is
hereby granted, provided that the above copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS ORIMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY,FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD
PARTY RIGHTS. INNO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS
OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OROTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USEOR OTHER DEALINGS
IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be
used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale,
71
use or other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization of the copyright holder.
libfreetypeex (2.4.2)
FreeType is a software development library, available
in source and binary forms, used to render text on to
bitmaps and provides support for other font-related
operations. The original download site for this
software is
: https://github.com/julienr/libfreetype-android
Freetype License
libjpegex (8a)
This package contains C software to implement JPEG
image encoding, decoding, and transcoding. This
software is based in part on the work of the
Independent JPEG Group.----------------------The
authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied, with respect to this
software, its quality, accuracy, merchantability, or
fitness for a particular purpose. This software is
provided "AS IS", and you, its user, assume the entire
risk as to its quality and accuracy. This software is
copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G. Lane. All Rights
Reserved except as specified below. Permission is
hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute
this software (or portions thereof) for any purpose,
without fee, subject to these conditions:(1) If any part
of the source code for this software is distributed,
then this README file must be included, with this
copyright and no-warranty notice unaltered; and any
additions, deletions, or changes to the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.(2) If only executable code is
distributed, then the accompanying documentation
must state that "this software is based in part on the
work of the Independent JPEG Group".(3) Permission
for use of this software is granted only if the user
accepts full responsibility for any undesirable
consequences; the authors accept NO LIABILITY for
damages of any kind. These conditions apply to any
software derived from or based on the IJG code, not
just to the unmodified library. If you use our work, you
ought to acknowledge us. Permission is NOT granted
for the use of any IJG author's name or company
name in advertising or publicity relating to this
software or products derived from it. This software
may be referred to only as "the Independent JPEG
Group's software". We specifically permit and
encourage the use of this software as the basis of
commercial products, provided that all warranty or
liability claims are assumed by the product vendor.
libpngex (1.4.1)
libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG)
reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a
platform-independent library that contains C
functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost
all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original
download site for this software is :
https://github.com/julienr/libpng-androidlibpng
license
dvbsnoop (1.2)
dvbsnoop is a DVB / MPEG stream analyzer program.
For generating CRC32 values required for composing
PAT, PMT, EIT sections The original download site for
this software is : https://github.com/a4tunado/dvbsn
oop/blob/master/src/misc/crc32.cGPL
v2 http://dvbsnoop.sourceforge.net/dvbsnoop.html
gSoap (2.7.15)
The gSOAP toolkit is an open source C and C++
software development toolkit for SOAP/XML Web
services and generic (non-SOAP) C/C++ XML data
bindings. Part of the software embedded in this
product is gSOAP software. Portions created by
gSOAP are Copyright 2001-2009 Robert A. van
Engelen, Genivia inc. All Rights Reserved. THE
SOFTWARE IN THIS PRODUCT WAS IN PART
PROVIDED BY GENIVIA INC AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
restlet (2.3.0)
Restlet is a lightweight, comprehensive, open source
REST framework for the Java platform. Restlet is
suitable for both server and client Web applications. It
supports major Internet transport, data format, and
service description standards like HTTP and HTTPS,
SMTP, XML, JSON, Atom, and WADL. The original
download site for this software is
: http://restlet.org This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the
Apache License version 2.
FaceBook SDK (3.0.1)
72
This TV contains Facebook SDK. The Facebook SDK
for Android is the easiest way to integrate your
Android app with Facebook's platform. The SDK
provides support for Login with Facebook
authentication, reading and writing to Facebook APIs
and support for UI elements such as pickers and
dialogs. The original download site for this software is
: https://developer.facebook.com/docs/android
This piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of the Apache License version 2.
ffmpeg (2.1.3)
This TV uses FFmpeg. FFmpeg is a complete, cross-
platform solution to record, convert and stream audio
and video. The original download site for this
software is : http://ffmpeg.org This piece of software
is made available under the terms and conditions of
the GPL v2 license, which can be found below.
gson (2.3)
This TV uses gson. Gson is a Java library that can be
used to convert Java Objects into their JSON
representation. It can also be used to convert a JSON
string to an equivalent Java object. Gson can work
with arbitrary Java objects including pre-existing
objects that you do not have source-code of. The
original download site for this software is
: https://code.google.com/p/google-gson/ . This
piece of software is made available under the terms
and conditions of the Apache License 2.0
This software includes an implementation of the AES
Cipher, licensed by Brian Gladman. The original
download site for this software is
: http://www.gladman.me.uk/ This piece of software
is licensed by Brian Gladman.
libUpNp (1.2.1)
The original download site for this software is
: http://upnp.sourceforge.net/ This piece of software
is made available under the terms and conditions of
the BSD.
live555 (0.82)
Live555 provides RTP/RTCP/RTSP client.The original
download site for this software is
: http://www.live555.com This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
LGPL v2.1 license, which can be found below.
dnsmasq
Dnsmasq is a lightweight, easy to configure DNS
forwarder and DHCP server. The original download
site for this software is
:
https://android.googlesource.com/platform/external/
dnmasq This piece of software is made available
under the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license,
which can be found below.
TomCrypt (1.1)
iwedia stack is using tomcrypt for sw decryption. The
original download site for this software is
:
http://manpages.ubuntu.com/manpages/saucy/man
3/libtomcrypt.3.html. This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the
WTFPL.
u-boot (2011-12)
U-boot is a boot loader for embedded boards based
on ARM, MIPS and other processors, which can be
installed in a boot ROM and used to initialize and test
the hardware or to download and run application
code. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the GPL v2 license, which
can be found below.
AsyncHttpclient (1.4.9)
The original download site for this software is
: http://loopj.com/android-async-http/ This piece
of software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
httpclient-4.4.1.1 (4.4.1.1)
This is needed to import
cz.msebera.android.httpclient used by
AssyncHttpClientThe original download site for this
software is
:
http://mvnrepository.com/artifact/cz.msebera.androi
d/httpclient/4.4.1.1 This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the
APACHE LICENSE 2.0
Jackson Parser (2.x)
Ipepg client uses Jackson Parser for string
manipulation. The original download site for this
software is
: https://github.com/FasterXML/jackson-core This
piece of software is made available under the terms
and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
audio a2dp (2.x)
73
Bluetooth stack. The original download site for this
software is
:
https://android.googlesource.com/platform/system/
bt This piece of software is made available under the
terms and conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
libexif (0.6.21)
Exif JPEG header manipulation tool. The original
download site for this software is
: http://libexif.sourceforge.net/ This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
libexpat (2.1.0)
Expat XML Parser. The original download site for this
software is : http://www.libexpat.org/Expat is free
software. You may copy, distribute, and modify it
under the terms of the License contained in the file
COPYING distributed with this package. This license is
the same as the MIT/X Consortium license.
libFFTEm ( )
neven face recognition library. The original download
site for this software is : No info. This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the APACHE LICENSE 2.0
libicui18n (49.1.1)
International Components for unicode. The original
download site for this software is
: http://icu-project.org This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
BSD.
libiprouteutil (3.4.0)
iproute2 TCP/IP networking and traffic control. The
original download site for this software is
: http://www.linuxfoundation.org/ This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the GPL v2. which can be found below
libjpeg (3.4.0)
libjpeg-turbo is a JPEG image codec that uses SIMD
instructions (MMX, SSE2, NEON) to accelerate
baseline JPEG compression and decompression on
x86, x86-64, and ARM systems. The original
download site for this software is
: http://www.ijg.org/libjpeg-turbo is covered by
three compatible BSD-style open source licenses.
Refer to LICENSE.txt for a roll-up of license terms.
libmtp (1.0.1)
libmtp The original download site for this software is
: http://libmtp.sourceforge.net/ . This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the LGPL V2.
libmdnssd (320.10.80)
MDNS Responder. The mDNSResponder project is a
component of Bonjour, 5Apple's ease-of-use IP
networking initiative. The original download site for
this software is
:
http://www.opensource.apple.com/tarballs/mDNSRe
sponder/ This piece of software is made available
under the terms and conditions of the Apache license
version 2
libnfc_ndef ( )
The original download site for this software is : No
info. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the Apache license
version 2
libskia ( )
skia 2D graphics library Skia is a complete 2D graphic
library for drawing Text, Geometries, and Images. The
original download site for this software is
: http://code.google.com/p/skia/ This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the BSD.
libsonivox ( )
The original download site for this software is : No
info. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE
License Version 2.
libsqlite (3.9.2)
SQLite database. The original download site for this
software is : http://www.sqlite.org This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2.
libttspico ( )
The original download site for this software is : No
info. This piece of software is made available under
the terms and conditions of the Android APACHE
License Version 2.
74
libtinyalsa ( )
tinyalsa: a small library to interface with ALSA in the
Linux kernel. The original download site for this
software is : No info. This piece of software is made
available under the terms and conditions of the BSD.
wpa_supplicant (0.8)
Library used by legacy HAL to talk to wpa_supplicant
daemon. The original download site for this software
is : http://hostap.epitest.fi/ This piece of software is
made available under the terms and conditions of the
GPLv2.
libz (1.2.8)
zlib compression library. The original download site
for this software is : http://zlib.net This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the BSD.
iptables (1.4.20)
iptables is a user space application program that
allows a system administrator to configure the tables
provided by the Linux kernel firewall (implemented as
different Netfilter modules) and the chains and rules it
stores. Different kernel modules and programs are
currently used for different protocols; iptables applies
to IPv4The original download site for this software is
: https://android.googlesource.com/ This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the GPLv2.
toolbox (1.2.8)
The 'toolbox' command in Android is a multi-function
program. It encapsulates the functionality of many
common Linux commands (and some special Android
ones) into a single binary. This makes it more
compact than having all those other commands
installed individually. The original download site for
this software is
: https://android.googlesource.com/ This piece of
software is made available under the terms and
conditions of the Android APACHE License Version 2.
libssl
(7b8b9c17db93ea5287575b437c77fb36eeb81b31)
BoringSSL The original download site for this software
is
: https://boringssl.googlesource.com/boringssl/ This
piece of software is made available under the terms
and conditions of the BSD.
libOpenMAXAL
(7b8b9c17db93ea5287575b437c77fb36eeb81b31)
OpenMAX AL is an application-level multimedia
playback and recording API for mobile embedded
devicesThe original download site for this software is
: https://www.khronos.org/openmax/ License free
libOpenSLES (1.0)
Khronos OpenSL Sound API spec. The original
download site for this software is
: https://www.khronos.org/opensles/ License free
libEGL libGLESv1_CM (3.1)
Khronos OpenGL Graphics API spec. The original
download site for this software is
: https://www.opengl.org/ License free
libffmpeg_av (2.1)
FFmpeg media player. The original download site for
this software is : https://ffmpeg.org/ This piece of
software is licensed under LGPL v2.1
libcurlmheg (7.21.6)
curl for MHEG. The original download site for this
software is : https://ffmpeg.org/ Curl and libcurl are
licensed under a MIT/X derivate license. Please look
at https://curl.haxx.se/docs/copyright.html
boringssl
(af0e32cb84f0c9cc65b9233a3414d2562642b342)
ssl for MHEG, Taken from android M. The original
download site for this software is
: https://boringssl.googlesource.com/boringssl/
Licensed under BSD, please find in /android/n-
base/external/boringssl/NOTICE
libpng (1.6.22beta)
libpng is the official Portable Network Graphics (PNG)
reference library (originally called pnglib). It is a
platform-independent library that contains C
functions for handling PNG images. It supports almost
all of PNG's features, is extensible. The original
download site for this software is
: https://github.com/julienr/libpng-android This
code is released under the libpng license.
Hue SDK (1.8.1)
TV ambihue app uses Philips SDK to find the hue
bridge name. The original download site for this
software is
:
75
https://developers.meethue.com/documentation/jav
a-multi-platform-and-android-sdk
Opera Web Browser (SDK 4.8.0)
This TV contains Opera Browser Software.
Third-party licenses
WebKit
name License
WebKit URL: http://webkit.org/
(WebKit doesn't distribute an explicit license. This
LICENSE is derived from license text in the source.)
Copyright (c) 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002,
2003, 2004, 2005, 2006, 2007 Alexander Kellett,
Alexey Proskuryakov, Alex Mathews, Allan Sandfeld
Jensen, Alp Toker, Anders Carlsson, Andrew
Wellington, Antti Koivisto, Apple Inc., Arthur
Langereis, Baron Schwartz, Bjoern Graf, Brent
Fulgham, Cameron Zwarich, Charles Samuels,
Christian Dywan, Collabora Ltd., Cyrus Patel, Daniel
Molkentin, Dave Maclachlan, David Smith, Dawit
Alemayehu, Dirk Mueller, Dirk Schulze, Don Gibson,
Enrico Ros, Eric Seidel, Frederik Holljen, Frerich
Raabe, Friedmann Kleint, George Staikos, Google
Inc., Graham Dennis, Harri Porten, Henry
Mason, Hiroyuki Ikezoe, Holger Hans Peter Freyther,
IBM, James G. Speth, Jan Alonzo, Jean-Loup Gailly,
John Reis, Jonas Witt, Jon Shier, Jonas Witt, Julien
Chaffraix, Justin Haygood, Kevin Ollivier, Kevin
Watters, Kimmo Kinnunen, Kouhei Sutou, Krzysztof
Kowalczyk, Lars Knoll, Luca Bruno, Maks Orlovich,
Malte Starostik, Mark Adler, Martin Jones, Marvin
Decker, Matt Lilek, Michael Emmel, Mitz Pettel,
mozilla.org, Netscape Communications Corporation,
Nicholas Shanks, Nikolas Zimmermann, Nokia, Oliver
Hunt, Opened Hand, Paul Johnston, Peter Kelly,
Pioneer Research Center USA, Rich Moore, Rob Buis,
Robin Dunn, Ronald Tschalär, Samuel Weinig, Simon
Hausmann, Staikos Computing Services Inc., Stefan
Schimanski, Symantec Corporation, The
Dojo Foundation, The Karbon Developers, Thomas
Boyer, Tim Copperfield, Tobias Anton, Torben Weis,
Trolltech, University of Cambridge, Vaclav Slavik,
Waldo Bastian, Xan Lopez, Zack Rusin
The terms and conditions vary from file to file, but
are one of:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
*OR*
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE
COMPUTER, INC. ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL APPLE COMPUTER, INC.
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA,
OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301
USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take
away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is
free for all its users.
This license, the Library General Public License,
applies to some specially designated Free Software
Foundation software, and to any other libraries
whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for
your libraries, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or
can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and
that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions
that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender the rights. These restrictions
76
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link a program with the library,
you must provide complete object files to the
recipients so that they can relink them with the library,
after making changes to the library and recompiling it.
And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
Our method of protecting your rights has two steps:
(1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the library.
Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is
no warranty for this free library. If the library is
modified by someone else and passed on, we want
its recipients to know that what they have is not the
original version, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors'
reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by
software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
companies distributing free software will individually
obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the
program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed
for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is
covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License,
which was designed for utility programs. This license,
the GNU Library General Public License, applies to
certain designated libraries. This license is quite
different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in
full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same
as in the ordinary license.
The reason we have a separate public license for
some libraries is that they blur the distinction we
usually make between modifying or adding to a
program and simply using it. Linking a program with
a library, without changing the library, is in some
sense simply using the library, and is analogous to
running a utility program or application program.
However, in a textual and legal sense, the linked
executable is a combined work, a derivative of the
original library, and the ordinary General Public
License treats it as such.
Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary
General Public License for libraries did not effectively
promote software sharing, because most developers
did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker
conditions might promote sharing better.
However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs
would deprive the users of those programs of all
benefit from the free status of the libraries
themselves. This Library General Public License is
intended to permit developers of non-free programs
to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as
a user of such programs to change the free libraries
that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how
to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but
we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual
functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead
to faster development of free libraries.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a"work based on
the library" and a "work that uses the library". The
former contains code derived from the library, while
the latter only works together with the library.
Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by
the ordinary General Public License rather than by
this special one.
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL
PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software
library which contains a notice placed by the
copyright holder or other authorized party saying it
may be distributed under the terms of this
Library General Public License (also called "this
License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some of
those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software
library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means
either the Library or any derivative work
under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing
the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly
into another language. (Hereinafter, translation
is included without limitation in the term
"modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for
all modules it contains, plus any associate interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running a program
77
using the Library is not restricted, and output
from such a program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Library (independent
of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it).
Whether that is true depends on what the Library
does and what the program that uses the Library
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
Library's complete source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to
the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy
of this License along with the
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library
or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software
library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than
as an argument passed when the facility is invoked,
then you must make a good faith effort to ensure
that, in the event an application does not supply
such function or table, the facility still operates, and
performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute
square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-
defined independent of the application. Therefore,
Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must be
optional: if the application does not supply it, the
squareroot function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus
to each and every part regardless of who
wrote. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim
rights or contest your rights to work written entirely
by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to
control the distribution of derivative or collective
works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary
GNU General Public License instead of this License
to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must
alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that
they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public
License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a
newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU
General Public License has appeared, then you can
specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not
make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of
the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a
portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with
the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code
from the same place satisfies the requirement
to distribute the source code, even though third
parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any
portion of the Library, but is designed to work with
the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is
called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in
isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library,
and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with
the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
78
of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a "work that uses the library".
The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material
from a header file that is part of the Library, the
object code for the work may be a derivative work of
the Library even though the source code is
not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the
work can be linked without the Library, or if the work
is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is
not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library,
you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables
containing that work also fall under Section
6, whether or not they are linked directly with the
Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may
also compile or link a "work that uses the Library"
with the Library to produce a work containing
portions of the Library, and distribute that
work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the
customer's own use and reverse engineering for
debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of
the work that the Library is used in it and that the
Library and its use are covered by this License. You
must supply a copy of this License. If the
work during execution displays copyright notices,
you must include the copyright notice for the Library
among them, as well as a reference directing the user
to the copy of this License. Also, you must do
one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code for
the Library including whateve changes were used in
the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1
and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable
linked with the Library, with the complete machine-
readable "work that uses the Library", as object code
and/or source code, so that the user can modify the
Library and then relink to produce a
modified executable containing the modified
Library. (It is understood that the user who changes
the contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to
use the modified definitions.)
b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid
for at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a
charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
c) If distribution of the work is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
d) Verify that the user has already received a
copy of these materials or that you have already sent
this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable
from it. However, as a special exception, the source
code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable
runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system.
Such a contradiction means you cannot use both
them and the Library together in an executable that
you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work
based on the Library side-by-side in a single library
together with other library facilities not covered by
this License, and distribute such a combined library,
provided that the separate distribution of the work
based on the Library and of the other library facilities
is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do
these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy
of the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be
distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined
library of the fact that part of it is a work based on
the Library, and explaining where to find the
accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights
under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this
License will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since
79
you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the
Library or its derivative works. These actions
are prohibited by law if you do not accept this
License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Library (or any work based on the Library), you
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Library or works based
on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work
based on the Library), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose
any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of
the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or
allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are
imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement
or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions
of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to
satisfy simultaneously your obligations under
this License and any other pertinent obligations, then
as a consequence you may not distribute the Library
at all. For example, if a patent license would not
permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all
those who receive copies directly or indirectly
through you, then the only way you could satisfy
both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance,
the balance of the section is intended to apply, and
the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section
has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the
free software distribution system which
is implemented by public license practices. Many
people have made generous contributions to the
wide range of software distributed through that
system in reliance on consistent application of
that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if
he or she is willing to distribute software through any
other system and a licensee cannot impose that
choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is
restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder
who places the Library under this License may
add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is
permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish
revised and/or new versions of the Library General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions
will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Library specifies a version number of
this License which applies to it and "any later
version", you have the option of following the terms
and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Library does not specify a license version
number, you may choose any version ever published
by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into
other free programs whose distribution conditions
are incompatible with these, write to the author to
ask for permission. For software which
is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision
will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free
status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE
80
LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
END OF TERMS AND
CONDITIONS
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation,
Inc.
51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA
02110-1301 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is
not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It
also counts as the successor of the GNU Library
Public License, version 2, hence the version number
2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take
away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is
free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License,
applies to some specially designated software
packages--typically libraries--of the Free Software
Foundation and other authors who decide to use it.
You can use it too, but we suggest you first think
carefully about whether this license or the ordinary
General Public License is the better strategy to use in
any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom of use, not price. Our General Public
Licenses are designed to make sure that you have
the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and
charge for this service if you wish); that you receive
source code or can get it if you want it; that you can
change the software and use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you are informed that you can
do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions
that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to
ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link other code with the library,
you must provide complete object files to the
recipients, so that they can relink them with the
library after making changes to the library and
recompiling it. And you must show them these terms
so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we
copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this
license, which gives you legal permission to copy,
distribute and/or modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very
clear that there is no warranty for the free library.
Also, if the library is modified by someone else and
passed on, the recipients should know that what
they have is not the original version, so that the
original author's reputation will not be affected by
problems that might be introduced by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the
existence of any free program. We wish to make
sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the
users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive
license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist
that any patent license obtained for a version of the
library must be consistent with the full freedom of
use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is
covered by the ordinary GNU General Public
License. This license, the GNU Lesser General
Public License, applies to certain designated libraries,
and is quite different from the ordinary General
Public License. We use this license for certain
libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into
non-free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether
statically or using a shared library, the combination
of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a
derivative of the original library. The
ordinary General Public License therefore permits
such linking only if the entire combination fits its
criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public
81
License permits more lax criteria for linking other code
with the library.
We call this license the "Lesser" General Public
License because it does Less to protect the user's
freedom than the ordinary General Public License.
It also provides other free software developers
Less of an advantage over competing non-free
programs. These disadvantages are the reason we
use the ordinary General Public License for
many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides
advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a
special need to encourage the widest possible use of
a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto
standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must
be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case
is that a free library does the same job as widely
used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only,
so we use the Lesser General Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in
non-free programs enables a greater number of
people to use a large body of free software. For
example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-
free programs enables many more people to use the
whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant,
the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less
protective of the users' freedom, it does ensure that
the user of a program that is linked with the Library
has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that
program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based
on the library" and a "work that uses the library".
The former contains code derived from the library,
whereas the latter must be combined with the library
in order to run.
GNU LESSER GENERAL
PUBLIC LICENSE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software
library or other program which contains a notice
placed by the copyright holder or other authorized
party saying it may be distributed under the terms
of this Lesser General Public License (also called
"this License"). Each licensee is addressed as "you".
A "library" means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently
linked with application programs (which use some of
those functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software
library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means
either the Library or any derivative work
under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing
the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly
into another language. (Hereinafter, translation
is included without limitation in the term
"modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for
all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they
are outside its scope. The act of running a program
using the Library is not restricted, and output
from such a program is covered only if its contents
constitute a work based on the Library (independent
of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it).
Whether that is true depends on what the Library
does and what the program that uses the Library
does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the
Library's complete source code as you receive it, in
any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate
copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep
intact all the notices that refer to this License and to
the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy
of this License along with the Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library
or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the
Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided
that you also meet all of these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software
library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry
prominent noticesstating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than
as an argument passed when the facility is invoked,
then you must make a good faith effort to ensure
that, in the event an application does not supply
82
such function or table, the facility still operates, and
performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute
square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-
defined independent of the application. Therefore,
Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must be
optional: if the application does not supply it, the
square root function must still compute square
roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works
in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus
to each and every part regardless of who wrote
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights
or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary
GNU General Public License instead of this License
to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must
alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that
they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public
License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a
newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU
General Public License has appeared, then you can
specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not
make any other change in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of
the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a
portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object
code or executable form under the terms of Sections
1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with
the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code, which must be distributed under the
terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium
customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then
offering equivalent access to copy the source code
from the same place satisfies the requirement
to distribute the source code, even though third
parties are not compelled to copy the source along
with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any
portion of the Library, but is designed to work with
the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is
called a "work that uses the Library". Such a work, in
isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library,
and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with
the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a "work that uses the library".
The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material
from a header file that is part of the Library, the
object code for the work may be a derivative work of
the Library even though the source code is
not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the
work can be linked without the Library, or if the work
is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is
not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library,
you may distribute the object code for the work
under the terms of Section 6. Any executables
containing that work also fall under Section
6, whether or not they are linked directly with the
Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may
also combine or link a "work that uses the Library"
with the Library to produce a work containing
portions of the Library, and distribute that
work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the
customer's own use and reverse engineering for
debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the Library is used in it and that the Library
and its use are covered by this License. You must
supply a copy of this License. If the work during
execution displays copyright notices, you must
83
include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the
copy of this License. Also, you must do one of
these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code for
the Library including whatever changes were used in
the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1
and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable
linked with the Library, with the complete machine-
readable "work that uses the Library", as object code
and/or source code, so that the user can modify the
Library and then relink to produce a
modified executable containing the modified
Library. (It is understood that the user who changes
the contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to
use the modified definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for
linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is
one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library
already present on the user's computer syste rather
than copying library functions into the executable,
and (2) will operate properly with a modified version
of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the
modified version is interface-compatible with the
version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid
for at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a
charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy
of these materials or that you have already sent this
user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable
from it. However, as a special exception, the
materials to be distributed need not include anything
that is normally distributed (in either source or binary
form) with the major components (compiler, kernel,
and so on) of the operating system on which the
executable runs, unless that component itself
accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system.
Such a contradiction means you cannot use both
them and the Library together in an executable that
you
7. You may place library facilities that are a work
based on the Library side-by-side in a single library
together with other library facilities not covered by
this License, and distribute such a combined library,
provided that the separate distribution of the work
based on the Library and of the other library facilities
is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do
these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy
of the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be
distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined
library of the fact that part of it is a work based on
the Library, and explaining where to find the
accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or
distribute the Library except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library
is void, and will automatically terminate your rights
under this License. However, parties who have
received copies, or rights, from you under this
License will not have their licenses terminated so
long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since
you have not signed it. However, nothing else
grants you permission to modify or distribute the
Library or its derivative works. These actions
are prohibited by law if you do not accept this
License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the
Library (or any work based on the Library), you
indicate your acceptance of this License to do so,
and all its terms and conditions for copying,
distributing or modifying the Library or works based
on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work
based on the Library), the recipient automatically
receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to
these terms and conditions. You may not impose
any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of
the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties with this
License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or
allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are
imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement
or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions
of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to
satisfy simultaneously your obligations under
this License and any other pertinent obligations, then
as a consequence you may not distribute the Library
at all. For example, if a patent license would not
permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all
those who receive copies directly or indirectly
84
through you, then the only way you could satisfy
both it and this License would be to refrain entirely
from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance,
the balance of the section is intended to apply, and
the section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section
has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the
free software distribution system which
is implemented by public license practices. Many
people have made generous contributions to the
wide range of software distributed through that
system in reliance on consistent application of
that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if
he or she is willing to distribute software through any
other system and a licensee cannot impose that
choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is
restricted in certain countries either by patents or by
copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder
who places the Library under this License may
add an explicit geographical distribution limitation
excluding those countries, so that distribution is
permitted only in or among countries not thus
excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish
revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General
Public License from time to time. Such new versions
will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Library specifies a version number of
this License which applies to it and "any later
version", you have the option of following the terms
and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Library does not specify a license version
number, you may choose any version ever published
by the Free Software Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into
other free programs whose distribution conditions
are incompatible with these, write to the author to
ask for permission. For software which
is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we
sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision
will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free
status of all derivatives of our free software and of
promoting the sharing and reuse of software
generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR
OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY "AS IS"
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY
AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY
PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME
THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY
APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN
WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY
OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY
AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
DATA OR DATA BEING
RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A
FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY
OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF
SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
END OF TERMS AND
CONDITIONS
Other
name License
Chromium URL: http://www.chromium.org
85
Copyright (c) 2013 The Chromium Authors. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
--
The following files are distributed under the MPL
1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license:
chromium-nss.h
chromium-blapi.h
chromium-blapit.h
chromium-sha256.h
chromium-prtypes.h
The following files contain portions distributed under
the MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1 tri-license:
registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_dom
ain.cc
registry_controlled_domains/registry_controlled_dom
ain.h
The following files are distributed under the MPL 2.0
license:
Fontconfig
URL: http://www.fontconfig.org
Copyright © 2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2006,2007
Keith Packard
Copyright © 2005 Patrick Lam
Copyright © 2009 Roozbeh Pournader
Copyright © 2008,2009 Red Hat, Inc.
Copyright © 2008 Danilo Šegan
Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell
this software and its
documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
without fee, provided that
the above copyright notice appear in all copies and
that both that
copyright notice and this permission notice appear in
supporting
documentation, and that the name of the author(s)
not be used in
advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of
the software without
specific, written prior permission. The authors make
no
representations about the suitability of this software
for any purpose. It
is provided "as is" without express or implied
warranty.
THE AUTHOR(S) DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH
86
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Arphic fonts
URL:
http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/CJKUnifo
nts/Download
ARPHIC PUBLIC LICENSE
Copyright (C) 1999 Arphic Technology Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved except as specified below.
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is
forbidden.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to
take away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the ARPHIC PUBLIC LICENSE specifically
permits and encourages you to use this software,
provided that you give the recipients all the rights that
we gave you and make sure they can get the
modifications of this software.
Legal Terms
Throughout this License, "Font" means the
TrueType fonts "AR PL Mingti2L Big5", "AR PL KaitiM
Big5" (BIG-5 character set) and "AR PL SungtiL GB",
"AR PL KaitiM GB" (GB character set) which are
originally distributed by Arphic, and the derivatives of
those fonts created through any modification
including modifying glyph, reordering glyph,
converting format, changing font name, or
adding/deleting some characters in/from glyph table.
"PL" means "Public License".
"Copyright Holder" means whoever is named in
the copyright or copyrights for the Font.
"You" means the licensee, or person copying,
redistributing or modifying the Font.
"Freely Available" means that you have the
freedom to copy or modify the Font as well as
redistribute copies of the Font under the same
conditions you received, not price. If you wish, you
can charge for this service.
You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of
this Font in any medium, without restriction, provided
that you retain this license file (ARPHICPL.TXT)
unaltered in all copies.
You may otherwise modify your copy of this Font
in any way, including modifying glyph, reordering
glyph, converting format, changing font name, or
adding/deleting some characters in/from glyph table,
and copy and distribute such modifications under the
terms of Section 1 above, provided that the following
conditions are met:
a) You must insert a prominent notice in each
modified file stating how and when you changed that
file.
b) You must make such modifications Freely
Available as a whole to all third parties under the
terms of this License, such as by offering access to
copy the modifications from a designated place, or
distributing the modifications on a medium
customarily used for software interchange.
c) If the modified fonts normally reads
commands interactively when run, you must cause it,
when started running for such interactive use in the
most ordinary way, to print or display an
announcement including an appropriate copyright
notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else,
saying that you provide a warranty) and that users
may redistribute the Font under these conditions, and
telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
These requirements apply to the modified work
as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Font, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. Therefore, mere aggregation of
another work not based on the Font with the Font on
a volume of a storage or distribution medium does
not bring the other work under the scope of this
License.
You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or
distribute the Font except as expressly provided
under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy,
modify, sublicense or distribute the Font will
automatically retroactively void your rights under this
License. However, parties who have received copies
or rights from you under this License will keep their
licenses valid so long as such parties remain in full
compliance.
You are not required to accept this License, since
you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants
87
you permission to copy, modify, sublicense or
distribute the Font. These actions are prohibited by
law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by
copying, modifying, sublicensing or distributing the
Font, you indicate your acceptance of this License
and all its terms and conditions.
Each time you redistribute the Font, the recipient
automatically receives a license from the original
licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Font subject
to these terms and conditions. You may not impose
any further restrictions on the recipients' exercise of
the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for
enforcing compliance by third parties to this License.
If, as a consequence of a court judgment or
allegation of patent infringement or for any other
reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are
imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement
or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this
License, they do not excuse you from the conditions
of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy
simultaneously your obligations under this License
and any other pertinent obligations, then as a
consequence you may not distribute the Font at all.
For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Font by all those
who receive copies directly or indirectly through you,
then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution
of the Font.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
BECAUSE THE FONT IS LICENSED FREE OF
CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE FONT,
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW.
EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR OTHER PARTIES
PROVIDE THE FONT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
FONT IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE FONT PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR
AGREED TO IN WRITING, IN NO EVENT WILL ANY
COPYRIGHTT HOLDERS, OR OTHER PARTIES WHO
MAY COPY, MODIFY OR REDISTRIBUTE THE FONT
AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT
(INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF
USE, DATA OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDERS OR
OTHER PARTIES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Bitstream Vera fonts
URL:
http://www.gnome.org/fonts/#Final_Bitstream_Vera
_Fonts
Bitstream Vera Fonts Copyright
The fonts have a generous copyright, allowing
derivative works (as long as "Bitstream" or "Vera" are
not in the names), and full redistribution (so long as
they are not *sold* by themselves). They can be be
bundled, redistributed and sold with any software.
The fonts are distributed under the following
copyright:
Copyright
=========
Copyright (c) 2003 by Bitstream, Inc. All Rights
Reserved. Bitstream
Vera is a trademark of Bitstream, Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
a copy of the fonts accompanying this license
("Fonts") and associated
documentation files (the "Font Software"), to
reproduce and distribute
the Font Software, including without limitation the
rights to use,
copy, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of
the Font
Software, and to permit persons to whom the Font
Software is furnished
to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright and trademark notices and this
permission notice
shall be included in all copies of one or more of the
Font Software
The Font Software may be modified, altered, or
added to, and in
particular the designs of glyphs or characters in the
Fonts may be
modified and additional glyphs or characters may be
added to the
Fonts, only if the fonts are renamed to names not
containing either
the words "Bitstream" or the word "Vera".
88
This License becomes null and void to the extent
applicable to Fonts
or Font Software that has been modified and is
distributed under the
"Bitstream Vera" names.
The Font Software may be sold as part of a larger
software package but
no copy of one or more of the Font Software
typefaces may be sold by itself.
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER
RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
BITSTREAM OR THE GNOME FOUNDATION BE
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL,
SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR
INABILITY TO USE THE FONT
SOFTWARE OR FROM OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
FONT SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the names of
Gnome, the Gnome
Foundation, and Bitstream Inc., shall not be used in
advertising or
otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings
in this Font
Software without prior written authorization from the
Gnome Foundation
or Bitstream Inc., respectively. For further information,
contact:
fonts at gnome dot org.
Copyright FAQ
=============
1. I don't understand the resale restriction... What
gives?
Bitstream is giving away these fonts, but
wishes to ensure its
competitors can't just drop the fonts as is into
a font sale system
and sell them as is. It seems fair that if
Bitstream can't make money
from the Bitstream Vera fonts, their
competitors should not be able to
do so either. You can sell the fonts as part of
any software package,
however.
2. I want to package these fonts separately for
distribution and
sale as part of a larger software package or
system. Can I do so?
Yes. A RPM or Debian package is a "larger
software package" to begin
with, and you aren't selling them
independently by themselves.
See 1. above.
3. Are derivative works allowed?
Yes!
4. Can I change or add to the font(s)?
Yes, but you must change the name(s) of the
font(s).
5. Under what terms are derivative works allowed?
You must change the name(s) of the fonts.
This is to ensure the
quality of the fonts, both to protect Bitstream
and Gnome. We want to
ensure that if an application has opened a
font specifically of these
names, it gets what it expects (though of
course, using fontconfig,
substitutions could still could have occurred
during font
opening). You must include the Bitstream
copyright. Additional
copyrights can be added, as per copyright law.
Happy Font Hacking!
6. If I have improvements for Bitstream Vera, is it
possible they might get
adopted in future versions?
Yes. The contract between the Gnome
Foundation and Bitstream has
89
provisions for working with Bitstream to ensure
quality additions to
the Bitstream Vera font family. Please contact
us if you have such
additions. Note, that in general, we will want
such additions for the
entire family, not just a single font, and that
you'll have to keep
both Gnome and Jim Lyles, Vera's designer,
happy! To make sense to add
glyphs to the font, they must be stylistically in
keeping with Vera's
design. Vera cannot become a "ransom note"
font. Jim Lyles will be
providing a document describing the design
elements used in Vera, as a
guide and aid for people interested in
contributing to Vera.
7. I want to sell a software package that uses these
fonts: Can I do so?
Sure. Bundle the fonts with your software and
sell your software
with the fonts. That is the intent of the
copyright.
8. If applications have built the names "Bitstream
Vera" into them,
can I override this somehow to use fonts of my
choosing?
This depends on exact details of the software.
Most open source
systems and software (e.g., Gnome, KDE, etc.)
are now converting to
use fontconfig (see www.fontconfig.org) to
handle font configuration,
selection and substitution; it has provisions for
overriding font
names and subsituting alternatives. An
example is provided by the
supplied local.conf file, which chooses the
family Bitstream Vera for
"sans", "serif" and "monospace". Other
software (e.g., the XFree86
core server) has other mechanisms for font
substitution.
Open Sans fonts
URL:
http://www.google.com/fonts/specimen/Open+Sans
License for Open Sans Font Family
--------------------------------
Apache License
Version 2.0,
January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,
REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
1. Definitions.
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions
for use, reproduction,
and distribution as defined by Sections 1
through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or
entity authorized by
the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the
acting entity and all
other entities that control, are controlled by, or
are under common
control with that entity. For the purposes of
this definition,
"control" means (i) the power, direct or
indirect, to cause the
direction or management of such entity,
whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent
(50%) or more of the
outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or
Legal Entity
exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form
for making modifications,
including but not limited to software source
code, documentation
source, and configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting
from mechanical
90
transformation or translation of a Source form,
including but
not limited to compiled object code,
generated documentation,
and conversions to other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship,
whether in Source or
Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a
copyright notice that is included in or attached
to the work
(an example is provided in the Appendix
below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work,
whether in Source or Object
form, that is based on (or derived from) the
Work and for which the
editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations,
or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of
authorship. For the purposes
of this License, Derivative Works shall not
include works that remain
separable from, or merely link (or bind by
name) to the interfaces of,
the Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of
authorship, including
the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions
to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that
is intentionally
submitted to Licensor for inclusion in the Work
by the copyright owner
or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized
to submit on behalf of
the copyright owner. For the purposes of this
definition, "submitted"
means any form of electronic, verbal, or
written communication sent
to the Licensor or its representatives, including
but not limited to
communication on electronic mailing lists,
source code control systems,
and issue tracking systems that are managed
by, or on behalf of, the
Licensor for the purpose of discussing and
improving the Work, but
excluding communication that is
conspicuously marked or otherwise
designated in writing by the copyright owner
as "Not a Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any
individual or Legal Entity
on behalf of whom a Contribution has been
received by Licensor and
subsequently incorporated within the Work.
2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms
and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-
free, irrevocable
copyright license to reproduce, prepare
Derivative Works of,
publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense,
and distribute the
Work and such Derivative Works in Source or
Object form.
3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms
and conditions of
this License, each Contributor hereby grants to
You a perpetual,
worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-
free, irrevocable
(except as stated in this section) patent license
to make, have made,
use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise
transfer the Work,
where such license applies only to those
patent claims licensable
by such Contributor that are necessarily
infringed by their
Contribution(s) alone or by combination of
their Contribution(s)
with the Work to which such Contribution(s)
was submitted. If You
institute patent litigation against any entity
(including a
cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit)
alleging that the Work
or a Contribution incorporated within the Work
constitutes direct
or contributory patent infringement, then any
91
patent licenses
granted to You under this License for that
Work shall terminate
as of the date such litigation is filed.
4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and
distribute copies of the
Work or Derivative Works thereof in any
medium, with or without
modifications, and in Source or Object form,
provided that You
meet the following conditions:
(a) You must give any other recipients of the
Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License;
and
(b) You must cause any modified files to carry
prominent notices
stating that You changed the files; and
(c) You must retain, in the Source form of any
Derivative Works
that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and
attribution notices from the Source form
of the Work,
excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of
the Derivative Works; and
(d) If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as
part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works
that You distribute must
include a readable copy of the
attribution notices contained
within such NOTICE file, excluding those
notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative
Works, in at least one
of the following places: within a NOTICE
text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within
the Source form or
documentation, if provided along with
the Derivative Works; or,
within a display generated by the
Derivative Works, if and
wherever such third-party notices
normally appear. The contents
of the NOTICE file are for informational
purposes only and
do not modify the License. You may add
Your own attribution
notices within Derivative Works that You
distribute, alongside
or as an addendum to the NOTICE text
from the Work, provided
that such additional attribution notices
cannot be construed
as modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to
Your modifications and
may provide additional or different license
terms and conditions
for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your
modifications, or
for any such Derivative Works as a whole,
provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work
otherwise complies with
the conditions stated in this License.
5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You
explicitly state otherwise,
any Contribution intentionally submitted for
inclusion in the Work
by You to the Licensor shall be under the
terms and conditions of
this License, without any additional terms or
conditions.
Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein
shall supersede or modify
the terms of any separate license agreement
you may have executed
with Licensor regarding such Contributions.
6. Trademarks. This License does not grant
permission to use the trade
names, trademarks, service marks, or product
names of the Licensor,
except as required for reasonable and
customary use in describing the
origin of the Work and reproducing the
content of the NOTICE file.
92
7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by
applicable law or
agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the
Work (and each
Contributor provides its Contributions) on an
"AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF
ANY KIND, either express or
implied, including, without limitation, any
warranties or conditions
of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT,
MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. You are solely
responsible for determining the
appropriateness of using or redistributing the
Work and assume any
risks associated with Your exercise of
permissions under this License.
8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no
legal theory,
whether in tort (including negligence),
contract, or otherwise,
unless required by applicable law (such as
deliberate and grossly
negligent acts) or agreed to in writing, shall
any Contributor be
liable to You for damages, including any
direct, indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential damages of any
character arising as a
result of this License or out of the use or
inability to use the
Work (including but not limited to damages for
loss of goodwill,
work stoppage, computer failure or
malfunction, or any and all
other commercial damages or losses), even if
such Contributor
has been advised of the possibility of such
damages.
9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While
redistributing
the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You may
choose to offer,
and charge a fee for, acceptance of support,
warranty, indemnity,
or other liability obligations and/or rights
consistent with this
License. However, in accepting such
obligations, You may act only
on Your own behalf and on Your sole
responsibility, not on behalf
of any other Contributor, and only if You agree
to indemnify,
defend, and hold each Contributor harmless
for any liability
incurred by, or claims asserted against, such
Contributor by reason
of your accepting any such warranty or
additional liability.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to
your work.
To apply the Apache License to your work,
attach the following
boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by
brackets "[]"
replaced with your own identifying
information. (Don't include
the brackets!) The text should be enclosed in
the appropriate
comment syntax for the file format. We also
recommend that a
file or class name and description of purpose
be included on the
same "printed page" as the copyright notice
for easier
identification within third-party archives.
Copyright [yyyy] [name of copyright owner]
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0
(the "License");
you may not use this file except in compliance
with the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
93
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an
"AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language
governing permissions and
limitations under the License.
VL Gothic fonts
URL: http://dicey.org/vlgothic/index.html
License for VLGothic Font Family
--------------------------------
This font includes glyphs derived from M+ FONTS
which is created by
M+ FONTS PROJECT. License for M+ FONTS part is
described in M+ FONTS
PROJECT's license. See attached 'LICENSE_E.mplus'.
This font also includes glyphs derived from
Sazanami Gothic font which
is created by Electronic Font Open Laboratory
(/efont/). License for
Sazanami Gothic part is described in it's license. See
attached
'README.sazanami' for original Sazanami Gothic font
license.
This font also includes original glyphs which is
created by Daisuke
SUZUKI and Project Vine based on M+ FONTS. Licese
for VL Gothic
original glyphs is same as M+ FONTS PROJECT's
license.
There is no limitation and the below description is
not applied
as for in order not to reuse as font (ex: font is
embeded to documents).
Copyright (c) 1990-2003 Wada Laboratory, the
University of Tokyo.
Copyright (c) 2003-2004 Electronic Font Open
Laboratory (/efont/).
Copyright (C) 2003-2009 M+ FONTS PROJECT
Copyright (C) 2006-2009 Daisuke SUZUKI
<daisuke@vinelinux.org>.
Copyright (C) 2006-2009 Project Vine
<Vine@vinelinux.org>.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
are met:
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY WADA
LABORATORY, THE UNIVERSITY OF TOKYO AND
CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE LABORATORY OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Nanum fonts
URL: http://hangeul.naver.com/
Copyright (c) 2010, NAVER Corporation
(http://www.nhncorp.com),
with Reserved Font Name Nanum, Naver Nanum,
NanumGothic, Naver NanumGothic,
NanumMyeongjo, Naver NanumMyeongjo,
NanumBrush, Naver NanumBrush, NanumPen, Naver
NanumPen, Naver NanumGothicEco,
94
NanumGothicEco, Naver NanumMyeongjoEco,
NanumMyeongjoEco, Naver NanumGothicLight,
NanumGothicLight, NanumBarunGothic, Naver
NanumBarunGothic,
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open
Font License, Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with
a FAQ at: http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open
Font License, Version 1.1.
This license is copied below, and is also available with
a FAQ at:
http://scripts.sil.org/OFL
-------------------------------------------------
----------
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February
2007
-------------------------------------------------
----------
PREAMBLE
The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to
stimulate worldwide development of collaborative
font projects, to support the font creation efforts of
academic and linguistic communities, and to provide
a free and open framework in which fonts may be
shared and improved in partnership with others.
The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used,
studied, modified and redistributed freely as long as
they are not sold by themselves. The fonts, including
any derivative works, can be bundled,
embedded, redistributed and/or sold with any
software provided that any reserved names are not
used by derivative works. The fonts and
derivatives, however, cannot be released under any
other type of license. The requirement for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any
document created using the fonts or their derivatives.
DEFINITIONS
"Font Software" refers to the set of files released by
the Copyright Holder(s) under this license and clearly
marked as such. This may include source files, build
scripts and documentation.
"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specified
as such after the copyright statement(s).
"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font
Software components as distributed by the
Copyright Holder(s).
"Modified Version" refers to any derivative made by
adding to, deleting, or substituting -- in part or in
whole -- any of the components of the Original
Version, by changing formats or by porting the Font
Software to a new environment.
"Author" refers to any designer, engineer,
programmer, technical writer or other person who
contributed to the Font Software.
PERMISSION & CONDITIONS
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy,
merge, embed, modify,
redistribute, and sell modified and unmodified copies
of the Font
Software, subject to the following conditions:
1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual
components,
in Original or Modified Versions, may be sold by itself.
2) Original or Modified Versions of the Font Software
may be bundled,
redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided
that each copy
contains the above copyright notice and this license.
These can be
included either as stand-alone text files, human-
readable headers or
in the appropriate machine-readable metadata fields
within text or
binary files as long as those fields can be easily
viewed by the user.
3) No Modified Version of the Font Software may use
the Reserved Font
Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted
by the corresponding
Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the
primary font name as
presented to the users.
4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the
Author(s) of the Font
Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or
advertise any
Modified Version, except to acknowledge the
contribution(s) of the
Copyright Holder(s) and the Author(s) or with their
explicit written
95
5) The Font Software, modified or unmodified, in part
or in whole,
must be distributed entirely under this license, and
must not be
distributed under any other license. The requirement
for fonts to
remain under this license does not apply to any
document created
using the Font Software.
TERMINATION
This license becomes null and void if any of the
above conditions are
not met.
DISCLAIMER
THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT
OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER
RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.
Mini-XML
URL: http://www.msweet.org/projects.php?Z3
Mini-XML License
The Mini-XML library and included programs are
provided under the terms of the GNU Library General
Public License version 2 (LGPL2) with the following
exceptions:
If you link the application to a modified version of
Mini-XML, then the changes to Mini-XML must be
provided under the terms of the LGPL2 in sections 1,
2, and 4.
GNU LIBRARY GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307,
USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not
allowed.
[This is the first released version of the library GPL. It
is numbered 2 because it goes with version 2 of the
ordinary GPL.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take
away your freedom to share and change it. By
contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are
intended to guarantee your freedom to share and
change free software--to make sure the software is
free for all its users.
This license, the Library General Public License,
applies to some specially designated Free Software
Foundation software, and to any other libraries
whose authors decide to use it. You can use it for
your libraries, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to
freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are
designed to make sure that you have the freedom to
distribute copies of free software (and charge for this
service if you wish), that you receive source code or
can get it if you want it, that you can change the
software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and
that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions
that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask
you to surrender the rights. These restrictions
translate to certain responsibilities for you if you
distribute copies of the library, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library,
whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the
recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must
make sure that they, too, receive or can get the
source code. If you link a program with the library,
you must provide complete object files to the
recipients so that they can relink them with the library,
after making changes to the library and recompiling it.
And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
Our method of protecting your rights has two steps:
(1) copyright the library, and (2) offer you this license
which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute
and/or modify the library.
Also, for each distributor's protection, we want to
make certain that everyone understands that there is
96
no warranty for this free library. If the library is
modified by someone else and passed on, we want
its recipients to know that what they have is not the
original version, so that any problems introduced by
others will not reflect on the original authors'
reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by
software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that
companies distributing free software will individually
obtain patent licenses, thus in effect transforming the
program into proprietary software. To prevent this, we
have made it clear that any patent must be licensed
for everyone's free use or not licensed at all.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is
covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License,
which was designed for utility programs. This license,
the GNU Library General Public License, applies to
certain designated libraries. This license is quite
different from the ordinary one; be sure to read it in
full, and don't assume that anything in it is the same
as in the ordinary license.
The reason we have a separate public license for
some libraries is that they blur the distinction we
usually make between modifying or adding to a
program and simply using it. Linking a program with a
library, without changing the library, is in some sense
simply using the library, and is analogous to running a
utility program or application program. However, in a
textual and legal sense, the linked executable is a
combined work, a derivative of the original library,
and the ordinary General Public License treats it as
such.
Because of this blurred distinction, using the ordinary
General Public License for libraries did not effectively
promote software sharing, because most developers
did not use the libraries. We concluded that weaker
conditions might promote sharing better.
However, unrestricted linking of non-free programs
would deprive the users of those programs of all
benefit from the free status of the libraries
themselves. This Library General Public License is
intended to permit developers of non-free programs
to use free libraries, while preserving your freedom as
a user of such programs to change the free libraries
that are incorporated in them. (We have not seen how
to achieve this as regards changes in header files, but
we have achieved it as regards changes in the actual
functions of the Library.) The hope is that this will lead
to faster development of free libraries.
The precise terms and conditions for copying,
distribution and modification follow. Pay close
attention to the difference between a "work based on
the libary" and a "work that uses the library". The
former contains code derived from the library, while
the latter only works together with the library.
Note that it is possible for a library to be covered by
the ordinary General Public License rather than by
this special one.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING,
DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION
A "library" means a collection of software functions
and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked
with application programs (which use some of those
functions and data) to form executables.
The "Library", below, refers to any such software
library or work which has been distributed under
these terms. A "work based on the Library" means
either the Library or any derivative work under
copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the
Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with
modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included
without limitation in the term "modification".)
"Source code" for a work means the preferred form of
the work for making modifications to it. For a library,
complete source code means all the source code for
all modules it contains, plus any associated interface
definition files, plus the scripts used to control
compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and
modification are not covered by this License; they are
outside its scope. The act of running a program using
the Library is not restricted, and output from such a
program is covered only if its contents constitute a
work based on the Library (independent of the use of
the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true
depends on what the Library does and what the
program that uses the Library does.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of
transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer
warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry
prominent notices stating that you changed the files
and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be
licensed at no charge to all third parties under the
terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a
function or a table of data to be supplied by an
application program that uses the facility, other than
as an argument passed when the facility is invoked,
then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that,
in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and
performs whatever part of its purpose remains
meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute
square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-
defined independent of the application. Therefore,
97
Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied
function or table used by this function must be
optional: if the application does not supply it, the
square root function must still compute square roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a
whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not
derived from the Library, and can be reasonably
considered independent and separate works in
themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as
separate works. But when you distribute the same
sections as part of a whole which is a work based on
the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on
the terms of this License, whose permissions for other
licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to
each and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights
or contest your rights to work written entirely by you;
rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on
the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not
based on the Library with the Library (or with a work
based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or
distribution medium does not bring the other work
under the scope of this License.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is
irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU
General Public License applies to all subsequent
copies and derivative works made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of
the code of the Library into a program that is not a
library.
If distribution of object code is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, then offering
equivalent access to copy the source code from the
same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the
source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object
code.
However, linking a "work that uses the Library" with
the Library creates an executable that is a derivative
of the Library (because it contains portions of the
Library), rather than a "work that uses the library". The
executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such
executables.
When a "work that uses the Library" uses material
from a header file that is part of the Library, the object
code for the work may be a derivative work of the
Library even though the source code is not. Whether
this is true is especially significant if the work can be
linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a
library. The threshold for this to be true is not
precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters,
data structure layouts and accessors, and small
macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in
length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted,
regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work.
(Executables containing this object code plus
portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library,
you may distribute the object code for the work under
the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing
that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not
they are linked directly with the Library itself.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the
work that the Library is used in it and that the Library
and its use are covered by this License. You must
supply a copy of this License. If the work during
execution displays copyright notices, you must
include the copyright notice for the Library among
them, as well as a reference directing the user to the
copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these
things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete
corresponding machine-readable source code for the
Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and
2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with
the Library, with the complete machine-readable
"work that uses the Library", as object code and/or
source code, so that the user can modify the Library
and then relink to produce a modified executable
containing the modified Library. (It is understood that
the user who changes the contents of definitions files
in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile
the application to use the modified definitions.)
b) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for
at least three years, to give the same user the
materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a
charge no more than the cost of performing this
distribution.
c) If distribution of the work is made by offering
access to copy from a designated place, offer
equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
d) Verify that the user has already received a copy of
these materials or that you have already sent this user
a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the "work that
uses the Library" must include any data and utility
programs needed for reproducing the executable
from it. However, as a special exception, the source
code distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form)
with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so
on) of the operating system on which the executable
runs, unless that component itself accompanies the
executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the
98
license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that
do not normally accompany the operating system.
Such a contradiction means you cannot use both
them and the Library together in an executable that
you distribute.
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of
the same work based on the Library, uncombined
with any other library facilities. This must be
distributed under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of
the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library,
and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or
unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the
balance of the section is intended to apply, and the
section as a whole is intended to apply in other
circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to
infringe any patents or other property right claims or
to contest validity of any such claims; this section has
the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free
software distribution system which is implemented by
public license practices. Many people have made
generous contributions to the wide range of software
distributed through that system in reliance on
consistent application of that system; it is up to the
author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to
distribute software through any other system and a
licensee cannot impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear
what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of
this License.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number.
If the Library specifies a version number of this
License which applies to it and "any later version",
you have the option of following the terms and
conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the
Library does not specify a license version number,
you may choose any version ever published by the
Free Software Foundation.
NO WARRANTY
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of
the greatest possible use to the public, we
recommend making it free software that everyone
can redistribute and change. You can do so by
permitting redistribution under these terms (or,
alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General
Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to
the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of
each source file to most effectively convey the
exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at
least the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the
full notice is found.
one line to give the library's name and an idea of
what it does.
Copyright (C) year name of author
This library is free software; you can redistribute it
and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser
General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License,
or (at your option) any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be
useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even
the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
Lesser General Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser
General Public License along with this library; if not,
write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by
electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a
programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a
"copyright disclaimer" for the library, if necessary.
Here is a sample; alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest
in the library `Frob' (a library for tweaking knobs)
written by James Random Hacker.
signature of Ty Coon, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President
of Vice
That's all there is to it!
Boost
URL: http://www.boost.org/
Boost Software License - Version 1.0 - August 17th,
2003
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person or organization
obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying
documentation covered by
this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce,
display, distribute,
execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare
derivative works of the
Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the
Software is furnished to
99
do so, all subject to the following:
The copyright notices in the Software and this entire
statement, including
the above license grant, this restriction and the
following disclaimer,
must be included in all copies of the Software, in
whole or in part, and
all derivative works of the Software, unless such
copies or derivative
works are solely in the form of machine-executable
object code generated by
a source language processor.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE
DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
libcurl
URL: http://curl.haxx.se/
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1996 - 2014, Daniel Stenberg,
<daniel@haxx.se>.
All rights reserved.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software for any purpose
with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that
the above copyright
notice and this permission notice appear in all copies.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR
OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall not
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other dealings
in this Software without prior written authorization of
the copyright holder.
libcurl - lib/krb5.c
URL:
https://github.com/bagder/curl/blob/master/lib/krb5
.c
/* GSSAPI/krb5 support for FTP - loosely based on
old krb4.c
*
* Copyright (c) 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2013
Kungliga Tekniska Högskolan
* (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm,
Sweden).
* Copyright (c) 2004 - 2012 Daniel Stenberg
* All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
*
* 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names
of its contributors
* may be used to endorse or promote products
100
derived from this software
* without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE. */
libcurl - lib/security.c
URL:
https://github.com/bagder/curl/blob/master/lib/secu
rity.c
/* This source code was modified by Martin
Hedenfalk <mhe@stacken.kth.se> for
* use in Curl. His latest changes were done
2000-09-18.
*
* It has since been patched and modified a lot by
Daniel Stenberg
* <daniel@haxx.se> to make it better applied to curl
conditions, and to make
* it not use globals, pollute name space and more.
This source code awaits a
* rewrite to work around the paragraph 2 in the BSD
licenses as explained
* below.
*
* Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2013 Kungliga Tekniska
Högskolan
* (Royal Institute of Technology, Stockholm,
Sweden).
*
* Copyright (C) 2001 - 2013, Daniel Stenberg,
<daniel@haxx.se>, et al.
*
* All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
* are met:
*
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
*
* 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names
of its contributors
* may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software
* without specific prior written permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
101
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE. */
David M. Gay's floating point routines
URL: http://www.netlib.org/fp/
/*********************************************************
*******
*
* The author of this software is David M. Gay.
*
* Copyright (c) 1991, 2000, 2001 by Lucent
Technologies.
*
* Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software for any
* purpose without fee is hereby granted, provided
that this entire notice
* is included in all copies of any software which is or
includes a copy
* or modification of this software and in all copies of
the supporting
* documentation for such software.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS BEING PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
* WARRANTY. IN PARTICULAR, NEITHER THE
AUTHOR NOR LUCENT MAKES ANY
* REPRESENTATION OR WARRANTY OF ANY KIND
CONCERNING THE MERCHANTABILITY
* OF THIS SOFTWARE OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
*
********************************************************
*******/
dynamic annotations
URL: http://code.google.com/p/data-race-
test/wiki/DynamicAnnotations
/* Copyright (c) 2008-2009, Google Inc.
* All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
* met:
*
* * Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the
names of its
* contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
* this software without specific prior written
permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
* A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
* OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
* OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* ---
* Author: Kostya Serebryany
*/
libevent
URL: http://libevent.org/
Libevent is available for use under the following
license, commonly known
102
as the 3-clause (or "modified") BSD license:
==============================
Copyright (c) 2000-2007 Niels Provos
<provos@citi.umich.edu>
Copyright (c) 2007-2010 Niels Provos and Nick
Mathewson
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
are met:
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS
IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
==============================
Portions of Libevent are based on works by others,
also made available by
them under the three-clause BSD license above.
The copyright notices are
available in the corresponding source files; the license
is as above. Here's
a list:
Copyright (c) 2000 Dug Song
<dugsong@monkey.org>
Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of
California.
Copyright (c) 1998 Todd C. Miller
<Todd.Miller@courtesan.com>
Copyright (c) 2003 Michael A. Davis
<mike@datanerds.net>
Copyright (c) 2007 Sun Microsystems
Copyright (c) 2006 Maxim Yegorushkin
<maxim.yegorushkin@gmail.com>
Copyright 2002 Niels Provos
<provos@citi.umich.edu>
Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR)
URL: http://www.mozilla.org/projects/nspr/
/* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK *****
* Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
*
* The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
* 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except
in compliance with
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License
at
* http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
*
* Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
* WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License
* for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
* License.
*
* The Original Code is the Netscape Portable
Runtime (NSPR).
*
* The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
* Netscape Communications Corporation.
* Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 1998-2000
103
* the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
*
* Contributor(s):
*
* Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
* either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
* the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1
or later (the "LGPL"),
* in which case the provisions of the GPL or the
LGPL are applicable instead
* of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
* under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
* use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
* decision by deleting the provisions above and
replace them with the notice
* and other provisions required by the GPL or the
LGPL. If you do not delete
* the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
* the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
*
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */
Paul Hsieh's SuperFastHash
URL:
http://www.azillionmonkeys.com/qed/hash.html
Paul Hsieh OLD BSD license
Copyright (c) 2010, Paul Hsieh
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither my name, Paul Hsieh, nor the names of any
other contributors to the
code use may not be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
google-glog's symbolization library
URL: https://github.com/google/glog
Copyright (c) 2006, Google Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names of
its contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
104
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
valgrind
URL: http://valgrind.org
Notice that the following BSD-style license applies
to the Valgrind header
files used by Chromium (valgrind.h and
memcheck.h). However, the rest of
Valgrind is licensed under the terms of the GNU
General Public License,
version 2, unless otherwise indicated.
----------------------------------------------
------------------
Copyright (C) 2000-2008 Julian Seward. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must
not claim that you wrote the original
software. If you use this
software in a product, an acknowledgment in
the product
documentation would be appreciated but is
not required.
3. Altered source versions must be plainly marked
as such, and must
not be misrepresented as being the original
software.
4. The name of the author may not be used to
endorse or promote
products derived from this software without
specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Mozilla Personal Security Manager
URL: http://mxr.mozilla.org/mozilla-
central/source/security/manager/
/* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK *****
* Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
105
*
* The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
* 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except
in compliance with
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License
at
* http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
*
* Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
* WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License
* for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
* License.
*
* The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries.
*
* The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
* Netscape Communications Corporation.
* Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 2000
* the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
*
* Contributor(s):
*
* Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
* either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
* the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1
or later (the "LGPL"),
* in which case the provisions of the GPL or the
LGPL are applicable instead
* of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
* under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
* use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
* decision by deleting the provisions above and
replace them with the notice
* and other provisions required by the GPL or the
LGPL. If you do not delete
* the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
* the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
*
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */
Network Security Services (NSS)
URL:
http://www.mozilla.org/projects/security/pki/nss/
/* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK *****
* Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
*
* The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
* 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except
in compliance with
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License
at
* http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
*
* Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
* WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License
* for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
* License.
*
* The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries.
*
* The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
* Netscape Communications Corporation.
* Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 1994-2000
* the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
*
* Contributor(s):
*
* Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
* either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
* the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1
or later (the "LGPL"),
* in which case the provisions of the GPL or the
106
LGPL are applicable instead
* of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
* under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
* use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
* decision by deleting the provisions above and
replace them with the notice
* and other provisions required by the GPL or the
LGPL. If you do not delete
* the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
* the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
*
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */
open-vcdiff
URL: https://github.com/google/open-vcdiff
Almost Native Graphics Layer Engine
URL: http://code.google.com/p/angleproject/
Copyright (C) 2002-2013 The ANGLE Project Authors.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of TransGaming Inc., Google Inc.,
3DLabs Inc. Ltd., nor the names of their contributors
may be used to endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN
ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE,
EVEN IF ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
boringssl
URL: https://boringssl.googlesource.com/boringssl
LICENSE ISSUES
==============
The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e.
both the conditions of
the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay
license apply to the toolkit.
See below for the actual license texts. Actually both
licenses are BSD-style
Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues
related to OpenSSL
please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.
OpenSSL License
---------------
/* ==============================================
======================
* Copyright (c) 1998-2011 The OpenSSL Project. All
rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
* are met:
*
107
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
*
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in
* the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
* distribution.
*
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
use of this
* software must display the following
acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by
the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL
Project" must not be used to
* endorse or promote products derived from this
software without
* prior written permission. For written
permission, please contact
* openssl-core@openssl.org.
*
* 5. Products derived from this software may not be
called "OpenSSL"
* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names
without prior written
* permission of the OpenSSL Project.
*
* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must
retain the following
* acknowledgment:
* "This product includes software developed by
the OpenSSL Project
* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit
(http://www.openssl.org/)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL
PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY
* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR
* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT
* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
* ==============================================
======================
*
* This product includes cryptographic software
written by Eric Young
* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes
software written by Tim
* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
*/
Original SSLeay License
-----------------------
/* Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
(eay@cryptsoft.com)
* All rights reserved.
*
* This package is an SSL implementation written
* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).
* The implementation was written so as to conform
with Netscapes SSL.
*
* This library is free for commercial and non-
commercial use as long as
* the following conditions are aheared to. The
108
following conditions
* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the
RC4, RSA,
* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The
SSL documentation
* included with this distribution is covered by the
same copyright terms
* except that the holder is Tim Hudson
(tjh@cryptsoft.com).
*
* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any
Copyright notices in
* the code are not to be removed.
* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young
should be given attribution
* as the author of the parts of the library used.
* This can be in the form of a textual message at
program startup or
* in documentation (online or textual) provided with
the package.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
* are met:
* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or
use of this software
* must display the following acknowledgement:
* "This product includes cryptographic software
written by
* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"
* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the
rouines from the library
* being used are not cryptographic related :-).
* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a
derivative thereof) from
* the apps directory (application code) you must
include an acknowledgement:
* "This product includes software written by Tim
Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG
``AS IS'' AND
* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
* SUCH DAMAGE.
*
* The licence and distribution terms for any
publically available version or
* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this
code cannot simply be
* copied and put under another distribution licence
* [including the GNU Public Licence.]
*/
Brotli
URL: https://github.com/google/brotli
Google Cache Invalidation API
URL:
https://chromium.googlesource.com/chromium/src/+
/master/third_party/cacheinvalidation/README.chro
mium
Crashpad
URL: https://crashpad.chromium.org/
109
drawElements Quality Program
URL:
https://source.android.com/devices/graphics/testing.
html
dom-distiller-js
URL: https://github.com/chromium/dom-distiller
Copyright 2014 The Chromium Authors. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Parts of the following directories are available under
Apache v2.0
src/de
Copyright (c) 2009-2011 Christian Kohlschütter
third_party/gwt_exporter
Copyright 2007 Timepedia.org
third_party/gwt-2.5.1
Copyright 2008 Google
java/org/chromium/distiller/dev
Copyright 2008 Google
Apache License
Version 2.0, January 2004
http://www.apache.org/licenses/
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE,
REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION
"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for
use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by
Sections 1 through 9 of this document.
"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity
authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the
License.
110
"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting
entity and all other entities that control, are controlled
by, or are under common control with that entity. For
the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the
power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or
management of such entity, whether by contract or
otherwise, or (ii) ownership of fifty percent (50%) or
more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial
ownership of such entity.
"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal
Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.
"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for
making modifications, including but not limited to
software source code, documentation source, and
configuration files.
"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from
mechanical transformation or translation of a Source
form, including but not limited to compiled object
code, generated documentation, and conversions to
other media types.
"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in
Source or Object form, made available under the
License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is
included in or attached to the work (an example is
provided in the Appendix below).
"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in
Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived
from) the Work and for which the editorial revisions,
annotations, elaborations, or other modifications
represent, as a whole, an original work of authorship.
For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works
shall not include works that remain separable from, or
merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the
Work and Derivative Works thereof.
"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship,
including the original version of the Work and any
modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative
Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to
Licensor for inclusion in the Work by the copyright
owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized
to submit on behalf of the copyright owner. For the
purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any
form of electronic, verbal, or written communication
sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including
but not limited to communication on electronic
mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue
tracking systems that are managed by, or on behalf
of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and
improving the Work, but excluding communication
that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated
in writing by the copyright owner as "Not a
Contribution."
"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual
or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has
been received by Licensor and subsequently
incorporated within the Work.
You must give any other recipients of the Work or
Derivative Works a copy of this License; and
You must cause any modified files to carry prominent
notices stating that You changed the files; and
You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative
Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,
trademark, and attribution notices from the Source
form of the Work, excluding those notices that do not
pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and
If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its
distribution, then any Derivative Works that You
distribute must include a readable copy of the
attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,
excluding those notices that do not pertain to any
part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the
following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed
as part of the Derivative Works; within the Source
form or documentation, if provided along with the
Derivative Works; or, within a display generated by
the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party
notices normally appear. The contents of the NOTICE
file are for informational purposes only and do not
modify the License. You may add Your own
attribution notices within Derivative Works that You
distribute, alongside or as an addendum to the
NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such
additional attribution notices cannot be construed as
modifying the License.
You may add Your own copyright statement to Your
modifications and may provide additional or different
license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or
distribution of Your modifications, or for any such
Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use,
reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise
complies with the conditions stated in this License.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
Expat XML Parser
URL: http://sourceforge.net/projects/expat/
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source
Software Center Ltd
and Clark
111
Cooper
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006
Expat maintainers.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
fips181
URL: http://www.adel.nursat.kz/apg/
Copyright (c) 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002
Adel I. Mirzazhanov. All rights reserved
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
are met:
1.Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
2.Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3.The name of the author may not be used to
endorse or promote products
derived from this software without specific
prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
flac
URL: http://sourceforge.net/projects/flac/files/flac-
src/flac-1.2.1-src/flac-1.2.1.tar.gz/download
Copyright (C)
2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007 Josh
Coalson
112
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution.
- Neither the name of the Xiph.org Foundation nor
the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE FOUNDATION OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
harfbuzz-ng
URL: http://harfbuzz.org
HarfBuzz is licensed under the so-called "Old MIT"
license. Details follow.
For parts of HarfBuzz that are licensed under different
licenses see individual
files names COPYING in subdirectories where
applicable.
Copyright © 2010,2011,2012 Google, Inc.
Copyright © 2012 Mozilla Foundation
Copyright © 2011 Codethink Limited
Copyright © 2008,2010 Nokia Corporation and/or its
subsidiary(-ies)
Copyright © 2009 Keith Stribley
Copyright © 2009 Martin Hosken and SIL
International
Copyright © 2007 Chris Wilson
Copyright © 2006 Behdad Esfahbod
Copyright © 2005 David Turner
Copyright © 2004,2007,2008,2009,2010 Red Hat,
Inc.
Copyright © 1998-2004 David Turner and Werner
Lemberg
For full copyright notices consult the individual files in
the package.
Permission is hereby granted, without written
agreement and without
license or royalty fees, to use, copy, modify, and
distribute this
software and its documentation for any purpose,
provided that the
above copyright notice and the following two
paragraphs appear in
all copies of this software.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE
LIABLE TO ANY PARTY FOR
DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE AND
ITS DOCUMENTATION, EVEN
113
IF THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER HAS BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
ANY WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE
SOFTWARE PROVIDED HEREUNDER IS
ON AN "AS IS" BASIS, AND THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER
HAS NO OBLIGATION TO
PROVIDE MAINTENANCE, SUPPORT, UPDATES,
ENHANCEMENTS, OR MODIFICATIONS.
iccjpeg
URL: http://www.ijg.org
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied,
with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy,
merchantability, or
fitness for a particular purpose. This software is
provided "AS IS", and you,
its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and
accuracy.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G.
Lane.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this
software (or portions thereof) for any purpose,
without fee, subject to these
conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is
distributed, then this
README file must be included, with this copyright
and no-warranty notice
unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to
the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the
accompanying
documentation must state that "this software is based
in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group".
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only
if the user accepts
full responsibility for any undesirable consequences;
the authors accept
NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from
or based on the IJG code,
not just to the unmodified library. If you use our
work, you ought to
acknowledge us.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG
author's name or company name
in advertising or publicity relating to this software or
products derived from it.
This software may be referred to only as "the
Independent JPEG Group's
software".
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this
software as the basis of
commercial products, provided that all warranty or
liability claims are
assumed by the product vendor.
icu
URL: http://site.icu-project.org/
ICU License - ICU 1.8.1 and later
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright (c) 1995-2014 International Business
Machines Corporation and
others
All rights reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to
any person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the
114
"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish,
distribute, and/or sell copies of the Software, and
to permit persons to
whom the Software is furnished to do so, provided
that the above
copyright notice(s) and this permission notice
appear in all copies of
the Software and that both the above copyright
notice(s) and this
permission notice appear in supporting
documentation.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF
THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS
INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY
DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder shall
not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or
other dealings in this Software without prior
written authorization of
the copyright holder.
________________________________________
___________________________
All trademarks and registered trademarks
mentioned herein are the
property of their respective owners.
________________________________________
___________________________
Third-Party Software Licenses
This section contains third-party software notices
and/or additional
terms for licensed third-party software
components included within ICU
libraries.
1. Unicode Data Files and Software
COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE
Copyright © 1991-2014 Unicode, Inc. All rights
reserved.
Distributed under the Terms of Use in
http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated
documentation
(the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any
associated documentation
(the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software
without restriction, including without limitation the
rights to use,
copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell
copies of
the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Data Files
or Software are furnished to do so, provided that
(a) this copyright and permission notice appear with
all copies
of the Data Files or Software,
(b) this copyright and permission notice appear in
associated
documentation, and
(c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or
in the Software
as well as in the documentation associated with the
Data File(s) or
Software that the data or software has been modified.
THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED
"AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF
115
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS
NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY
SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of a
copyright holder
shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to
promote the sale,
use or other dealings in these Data Files or Software
without prior
written authorization of the copyright holder.
2. Chinese/Japanese Word Break Dictionary Data
(cjdict.txt)
# The Google Chrome software developed by
Google is licensed under the BSD li
ses, as set forth below.
#
# The BSD License
# http://opensource.org/licenses/bsd-
license.php
# Copyright (C) 2006-2008, Google Inc.
#
# All rights reserved.
#
# Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modifi
cation, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
#
# Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright notice, th
is list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
# Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
# Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the
names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without specific
prior written permission.
#
#
# THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS I
S" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPL
IED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLA
ECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDIN
G, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF L
IABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED O
F THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
#
#
# The word list in cjdict.txt are generated by
combining three word lists l
isted
# below with further processing for
compound word breaking. The frequency i
s generated
# with an iterative training against Google
web corpora.
#
# * Libtabe (Chinese)
#
- https://sourceforge.net/project/?group_id=1519
# - Its license terms and conditions are
shown below.
#
116
# * IPADIC (Japanese)
#
- http://chasen.aist-
nara.ac.jp/chasen/distribution.html
# - Its license terms and conditions are
shown below.
#
# ---------COPYING.libtabe ----
BEGIN--------------------
#
# /*
# * Copyrighy (c) 1999 TaBE Project.
# * Copyright (c) 1999 Pai-Hsiang Hsiao.
# * All rights reserved.
# *
# * Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
# * modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions
# * are met:
# *
# * . Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright
# * notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
# * . Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright
# * notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in
# * the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the
# * distribution.
# * . Neither the name of the TaBE Project
nor the names of its
# * contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived
# * from this software without specific
prior written permission.
# *
# * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
# * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
# * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
# * FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
# * REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
# * INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
# * (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
# * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
# * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
# * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
# * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
# * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
# */
#
# /*
# * Copyright (c) 1999 Computer Systems
and Communication Lab,
# * Institute of
Information Science, Academia Sinica.
# * All rights reserved.
# *
# * Redistribution and use in source and
binary forms, with or without
# * modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions
# * are met:
# *
# * . Redistributions of source code must
retain the above copyright
# * notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
# * . Redistributions in binary form must
reproduce the above copyright
# * notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in
# * the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the
# * distribution.
# * . Neither the name of the Computer
Systems and Communication Lab
# * nor the names of its contributors may
be used to endorse or
# * promote products derived from this
software without specific
117
# * prior written permission.
# *
# * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
# * "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
# * LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
# * FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
# * REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
# * INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
# * (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
# * SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
# * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
# * STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
# * ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
# * OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
# */
#
# Copyright 1996 Chih-Hao Tsai @ Beckman
Institute, University of Illinois
# c-tsai4@uiuc.edu
http://casper.beckman.uiuc.edu/~c-tsai4
#
# ---------------COPYING.libtabe-----END
-----------------------------------
-
#
#
# ---------------COPYING.ipadic-----BEGI
N----------------------------------
--
#
# Copyright 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003 Nara
Institute of Science
# and Technology. All Rights Reserved.
#
# Use, reproduction, and distribution of this
software is permitted.
# Any copy of this software, whether in its
original form or modified,
# must include both the above copyright
notice and the following
# paragraphs.
#
# Nara Institute of Science and Technology
(NAIST),
# the copyright holders, disclaims all
warranties with regard to this
# software, including all implied warranties of
merchantability and
# fitness, in no event shall NAIST be liable for
# any special, indirect or consequential
damages or any damages
# whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data
or profits, whether in an
# action of contract, negligence or other
tortuous action, arising out
# of or in connection with the use or
performance of this software.
#
# A large portion of the dictionary entries
# originate from ICOT Free Software. The
following conditions for ICOT
# Free Software applies to the current
dictionary as well.
#
# Each User may also freely distribute the
Program, whether in its
# original form or modified, to any third party
or parties, PROVIDED
# that the provisions of Section 3 ("NO
WARRANTY") will ALWAYS appear
# on, or be attached to, the Program, which is
distributed substantially
# in the same form as set out herein and that
such intended
# distribution, if actually made, will neither
violate or otherwise
# contravene any of the laws and regulations
of the countries having
# jurisdiction over the User or the intended
distribution itself.
#
# NO WARRANTY
118
#
# The program was produced on an
experimental basis in the course of the
# research and development conducted
during the project and is provided
# to users as so produced on an
experimental basis. Accordingly, the
# program is provided without any warranty
whatsoever, whether express,
# implied, statutory or otherwise. The term
"warranty" used herein
# includes, but is not limited to, any warranty
of the quality,
# performance, merchantability and fitness
for a particular purpose of
# the program and the nonexistence of any
infringement or violation of
# any right of any third party.
#
# Each user of the program will agree and
understand, and be deemed to
# have agreed and understood, that there is
no warranty whatsoever for
# the program and, accordingly, the entire
risk arising from or
# otherwise connected with the program is
assumed by the user.
#
# Therefore, neither ICOT, the copyright
holder, or any other
# organization that participated in or was
otherwise related to the
# development of the program and their
respective officials, directors,
# officers and other employees shall be held
liable for any and all
# damages, including, without limitation,
general, special, incidental
# and consequential damages, arising out of
or otherwise in connection
# with the use or inability to use the program
or any product, material
# or result produced or otherwise obtained
by using the program,
# regardless of whether they have been
advised of, or otherwise had
# knowledge of, the possibility of such
damages at any time during the
# project or thereafter. Each user will be
deemed to have agreed to the
# foregoing by his or her commencement of
use of the program. The term
# "use" as used herein includes, but is not
limited to, the use,
# modification, copying and distribution of
the program and the
# production of secondary products from the
program.
#
# In the case where the program, whether in
its original form or
# modified, was distributed or delivered to or
received by a user from
# any person, organization or entity other
than ICOT, unless it makes or
# grants independently of ICOT any specific
warranty to the user in
# writing, such person, organization or entity,
will also be exempted
# from and not be held liable to the user for
any such damages as noted
# above as far as the program is concerned.
#
# ---------------COPYING.ipadic-----END-
-----------------------------------
3. Lao Word Break Dictionary Data (laodict.txt)
Copyright (c) 2013 International Business Machines
Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved.
Project: http://code.google.com/p/lao-
dictionary/
Dictionary: http://lao-
dictionary.googlecode.com/git/Lao-Dictionary.txt
License: http://lao-dictionary.googlecode.com/g
it/Lao-Dictionary-LICEN
(copied below)
This file is derived from the above dictionary, with
slight modifications.
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
Copyright (C) 2013 Brian Eugene Wilson, Robert
Martin Campbell.
All rights reserved.
119
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright no
tice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions
in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
notice, this list of cond
itions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materi
als provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC
ES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A
ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
4. Burmese Word Break Dictionary Data
(burmesedict.txt)
Copyright (c) 2014 International Business Machines
Corporation and others. All Rights Reserved.
This list is part of a project hosted at:
github.com/kanyawtech/myanmar-karen-word-lists
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
Copyright (c) 2013, LeRoy Benjamin Sharon
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modifi
cation, are permitted provided that the following
conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above
copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notic
e, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer
in the documentation an
d/or other materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name Myanmar Karen Word Lists, nor
the names of its contributors may be used to
endorse or promote products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS I
S" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMP
LIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DA
MAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVIC
ES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED A
ND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
5. Time Zone Database
ICU uses the public domain data and code derived
from Time Zone Database
for its time zone support. The ownership of the TZ
database is explained
in BCP 175: Procedure for Maintaining the Time
Zone Database section 7.
120
1 - Database Ownership
The TZ database itself is not an IETF Contribution
or an IETF
document. Rather it is a pre-existing and
regularly updated work
that is in the public domain, and is intended to
remain in the public
domain. Therefore, BCPs 78 [RFC5378] and 79
[RFC3979] do not apply
to the TZ Database or contributions that
individuals make to it.
Should any claims be made and substantiated
against the TZ Database,
the organization that is providing the IANA
Considerations defined in
this RFC, under the memorandum of
understanding with the IETF,
currently ICANN, may act in accordance with all
competent court
orders. No ownership claims will be made by
ICANN or the IETF Trust
on the database or the code. Any person making
a contribution to the
database or code waives all rights to future claims
in that
contribution or in the TZ Database.
google-jstemplate
URL: http://code.google.com/p/google-jstemplate/
Khronos header files
URL: http://www.khronos.org/registry
Copyright (c) 2007-2010 The Khronos Group Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a
copy of this software and/or associated
documentation files (the
"Materials"), to deal in the Materials without
restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Materials, and to
permit persons to whom the Materials are furnished
to do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Materials.
THE MATERIALS ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
MATERIALS OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE MATERIALS.
SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept.
18, 2008)
Copyright (C) 1992 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights
Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy of
this software and associated documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in
the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights to
use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell copies
of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do
so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice including the dates of first
publication and either
this permission notice or a reference to
http://oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/
shall be included in all copies or substantial portions
of the Software.
121
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON
GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon
Graphics, Inc. shall
not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote
the sale, use or other
dealings in this Software without prior written
authorization from Silicon
Graphics, Inc.
LevelDB: A Fast Persistent Key-Value Store
URL: https://github.com/google/leveldb.git
Copyright (c) 2011 The LevelDB Authors. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The library to input, validate, and display
addresses.
URL: https://github.com/googlei18n/libaddressinput
libjingle
URL: http://www.webrtc.org
libjpeg
URL: http://www.ijg.org/
-------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------
The authors make NO WARRANTY or representation,
either express or implied,
with respect to this software, its quality, accuracy,
merchantability, or
fitness for a particular purpose. This software is
provided "AS IS", and you,
its user, assume the entire risk as to its quality and
122
accuracy.
This software is copyright (C) 1991-1998, Thomas G.
Lane.
All Rights Reserved except as specified below.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this
software (or portions thereof) for any purpose,
without fee, subject to these
conditions:
(1) If any part of the source code for this software is
distributed, then this
README file must be included, with this copyright
and no-warranty notice
unaltered; and any additions, deletions, or changes to
the original files
must be clearly indicated in accompanying
documentation.
(2) If only executable code is distributed, then the
accompanying
documentation must state that "this software is based
in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group".
(3) Permission for use of this software is granted only
if the user accepts
full responsibility for any undesirable consequences;
the authors accept
NO LIABILITY for damages of any kind.
These conditions apply to any software derived from
or based on the IJG code,
not just to the unmodified library. If you use our
work, you ought to
acknowledge us.
Permission is NOT granted for the use of any IJG
author's name or company name
in advertising or publicity relating to this software or
products derived from it.
This software may be referred to only as "the
Independent JPEG Group's
software".
We specifically permit and encourage the use of this
software as the basis of
commercial products, provided that all warranty or
liability claims are
assumed by the product vendor.
sole proprietor of its copyright holder, Aladdin
Enterprises of Menlo Park, CA.
by the usual distribution terms of the Free Software
Foundation; principally,
that you must include source code if you redistribute
it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for
full details.)
However, since ansi2knr.c is not needed as part
of any program generated from the IJG code, this
does not limit you more than
the foregoing paragraphs do.
The Unix configuration script "configure" was
produced with GNU Autoconf.
It is copyright by the Free Software Foundation but is
freely distributable.
The same holds for its supporting scripts
(config.guess, config.sub,
ltconfig, ltmain.sh). Another support script, install-sh,
is copyright
by M.I.T. but is also freely distributable.
It appears that the arithmetic coding option of the
JPEG spec is covered by
patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and Mitsubishi. Hence
arithmetic coding cannot
legally be used without obtaining one or more
licenses. For this reason,
support for arithmetic coding has been removed from
the free JPEG software.
(Since arithmetic coding provides only a marginal gain
over the unpatented
Huffman mode, it is unlikely that very many
implementations will support it.)
So far as we are aware, there are no patent
restrictions on the remaining
The IJG distribution formerly included code to read
and write GIF files.
To avoid entanglement with the Unisys LZW patent,
GIF reading support has
been removed altogether, and the GIF writer has
been simplified to produce
123
"uncompressed GIFs". This technique does not use
the LZW algorithm; the
resulting GIF files are larger than usual, but are
readable by all standard
GIF decoders.
We are required to state that
"The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the
Copyright property of
CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service
Mark property of
CompuServe Incorporated."
-------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------
Public License.
libjpeg-turbo
URL: http://sourceforge.net/projects/libjpeg-turbo/
libjpeg-turbo is licensed under a non-restrictive, BSD-
style license
(see README.) The TurboJPEG/OSS wrapper (both
C and Java versions) and
associated test programs bear a similar license, which
is reproduced below:
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in
the documentation
and/or other materials provided with the
distribution.
- Neither the name of the libjpeg-turbo Project nor
the names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from this
software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS",
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
International Phone Number Library
URL:
http://libphonenumber.googlecode.com/svn/trunk/
Copyright (C) 2011 Google Inc.
Licensed under the Apache License, Version 2.0 (the
"License");
you may not use this file except in compliance with
the License.
You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0
Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in
writing, software
distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS
IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF ANY
KIND, either express or implied.
See the License for the specific language governing
permissions and
124
limitations under the License.
libpng
URL: http://libpng.org/
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your
convenience. In case of
any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in
the file png.h that is
included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall
prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices
immediately following
this sentence.
This code is released under the libpng license.
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.54,
November 12, 2015, are
Copyright (c) 2000-2002, 2004, 2006-2015 Glenn
Randers-Pehrson, are
derived from libpng-1.0.6, and are distributed
according to the same
disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the
following individuals
added to the list of Contributing Authors:
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Cosmin Truta
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your
enjoyment of the
library or against infringement. There is no
warranty that our
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your
particular purposes
or needs. This library is provided with all faults,
and the entire
risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy,
and effort is with
the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6,
March 20, 2000, are
Copyright (c) 1998-2000 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, are
derived from
libpng-0.96, and are distributed according to the
same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals
added to the list
of Contributing Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May
1997, are
Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Andreas Dilger, are derived
from libpng-0.88,
and are distributed according to the same disclaimer
and license as
libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to
the list of
Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January
1996, are
Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42,
Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors"
is defined as the following set of individuals:
125
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The
Contributing Authors
and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed
or implied,
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of
fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors
and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary,
or consequential damages, which may result from the
use of the PNG
Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of
such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this
source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose,
without fee, subject
to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this source code must not be
misrepresented.
2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such
and must not
be misrepresented as being the original source.
3. This Copyright notice may not be removed or
altered from any
source or altered source distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without
fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a
component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this
source code in a product, acknowledgment is not
required but would be
END OF COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and
LICENSE.
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about"
boxes and the like:
printf("%s", png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the
files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and
"pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI
Certified Open Source is
a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. OSI
has not addressed
the additional disclaimers inserted at version 1.0.7.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net
November 12, 2015
libsrtp
URL: https://github.com/cisco/libsrtp
/*
*
* Copyright (c) 2001-2006 Cisco Systems, Inc.
* All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
* are met:
*
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
*
126
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
* copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following
* disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided
* with the distribution.
*
* Neither the name of the Cisco Systems, Inc. nor
the names of its
* contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived
* from this software without specific prior written
permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
* FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
* COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
* INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
* SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED
* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
*
*/
libusbx
URL: http://libusb.org
libvpx
URL: http://www.webmproject.org
Copyright (c) 2010, The WebM Project authors. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
distribution.
* Neither the name of Google, nor the WebM
Project, nor the names
of its contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products
derived from this software without specific prior
written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
127
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
WebP image encoder/decoder
URL: http://developers.google.com/speed/webp
Additional IP Rights Grant (Patents)
------------------------------------
"These implementations" means the copyrightable
works that implement the WebM
codecs distributed by Google as part of the WebM
Project.
Google hereby grants to you a perpetual, worldwide,
non-exclusive, no-charge,
royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in this
section) patent license to
make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import,
transfer, and otherwise
run, modify and propagate the contents of these
implementations of WebM, where
such license applies only to those patent claims, both
currently owned by
Google and acquired in the future, licensable by
Google that are necessarily
infringed by these implementations of WebM. This
grant does not include claims
that would be infringed only as a consequence of
further modification of these
or agree to the institution of patent litigation or any
other patent
enforcement activity against any entity (including a
cross-claim or
counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that any of these
implementations of WebM
or any code incorporated within any of these
implementations of WebM
constitute direct or contributory patent infringement,
or inducement of
patent infringement, then any patent rights granted to
you under this License
for these implementations of WebM shall terminate
as of the date such
litigation is filed.
libxml
URL: http://xmlsoft.org
Except where otherwise noted in the source code
(e.g. the files hash.c,
with different Copyright notices) all the files are:
Copyright (C) 1998-2012 Daniel Veillard. All Rights
Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy
of this software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is fur-
nished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE
OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
libxslt
URL: http://xmlsoft.org/XSLT
Licence for libxslt except libexslt
128
-------------------------------------------------
---------------------
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Daniel Veillard. All Rights
Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy
of this software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is fur-
nished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
DANIEL VEILLARD BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM,
DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON-
NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of Daniel
Veillard shall not
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other deal-
ings in this Software without prior written
authorization from him.
-------------------------------------------------
---------------------
Licence for libexslt
-------------------------------------------------
---------------------
Copyright (C) 2001-2002 Thomas Broyer, Charlie
Bozeman and Daniel Veillard.
All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a copy
of this software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal
in the Software without restriction, including without
limitation the rights
to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute,
sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons to
whom the Software is fur-
nished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CON-
NECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR
OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Except as contained in this notice, the name of the
authors shall not
be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the
sale, use or other deal-
ings in this Software without prior written
authorization from him.
-------------------------------------------------
---------------------
libyuv
URL: http://code.google.com/p/libyuv/
Copyright 2011 The LibYuv Project Authors. All rights
reserved.
129
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
distribution.
* Neither the name of Google nor the names of its
contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
linux-syscall-support
URL: http://code.google.com/p/linux-syscall-
support/
// Copyright 2015 The Chromium Authors. All rights
reserved.
//
// Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
// modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
// met:
//
// * Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright
// notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
// * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
// copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
// in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
// distribution.
// * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the
names of its
// contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
// this software without specific prior written
permission.
//
// THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
// "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
// A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
// OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
// SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
// DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
130
// THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
// (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
// OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
LZ4 - Extremely fast compression
URL: https://code.google.com/p/lz4/
LZ4 Library
Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification,
are permitted provided that the following conditions
are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON
ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
LZMA SDK
URL: http://www.7-zip.org/sdk.html
LZMA SDK is placed in the public domain.
mesa
URL: http://www.mesa3d.org/
The default Mesa license is as follows:
Copyright (C) 1999-2007 Brian Paul All Rights
Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
BRIAN PAUL BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES
OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE
OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
Some parts of Mesa are copyrighted under the GNU
LGPL. See the
Mesa/docs/COPYRIGHT file for details.
131
modp base64 decoder
URL: https://github.com/client9/stringencoders
* MODP_B64 - High performance base64
encoder/decoder
* Version 1.3 -- 17-Mar-2006
* http://modp.com/release/base64
*
* Copyright (c) 2005, 2006 Nick Galbreath -- nickg
[at] modp [dot] com
* All rights reserved.
*
* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
* modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
* met:
*
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
*
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
* notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
* documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
*
* Neither the name of the modp.com nor the
names of its
* contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived from
* this software without specific prior written
permission.
*
* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
* "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
* A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
* OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
* LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
* DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
* THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
* OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Mojo
URL: https://github.com/domokit/mojo
// Copyright 2014 The Chromium Authors. All rights
reserved.
//
// Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
// modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
// met:
//
// * Redistributions of source code must retain
the above copyright
// notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
// * Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
// copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
// in the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
// distribution.
// * Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the
names of its
// contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
// this software without specific prior written
permission.
//
// THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
132
// "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
// A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
// OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
// SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
// LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
// DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
// THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
// (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
// OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
mt19937ar
URL: http://www.math.sci.hiroshima-u.ac.jp/~m-
mat/MT/MT2002/emt19937ar.html
A C-program for MT19937, with initialization
improved 2002/1/26.
Coded by Takuji Nishimura and Makoto
Matsumoto.
Before using, initialize the state by using
init_genrand(seed)
or init_by_array(init_key, key_length).
Copyright (C) 1997 - 2002, Makoto Matsumoto
and Takuji Nishimura,
All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials
provided with the distribution.
3. The names of its contributors may not be
used to endorse or promote
products derived from this software without
specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN
NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Netscape Plugin Application Programming Interface
(NPAPI)
URL: http://mxr.mozilla.org/mozilla-
central/source/modules/plugin/base/public/
Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
133
the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed
on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express
or implied. See the License
for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
The Original Code is mozilla.org code.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
Netscape Communications Corporation.
Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 1998
the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s):
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or
later (the "LGPL"),
in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL
are applicable instead
of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
decision by deleting the provisions above and replace
them with the notice
and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL.
If you do not delete
the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
OpenMAX DL
URL:
https://silver.arm.com/download/Software/Graphics/
OX000-BU-00010-r1p0-00bet0/OX000-BU-00010
-r1p0-00bet0.tgz
Use of this source code is governed by a BSD-style
license that can be
found in the LICENSE file in the root of the source
tree. All
contributing project authors may be found in the
AUTHORS file in the
root of the source tree.
The files were originally licensed by ARM Limited.
The following files:
* dl/api/omxtypes.h
* dl/sp/api/omxSP.h
are licensed by Khronos:
Copyright © 2005-2008 The Khronos Group Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
These materials are protected by copyright laws and
contain material
proprietary to the Khronos Group, Inc. You may use
these materials
for implementing Khronos specifications, without
altering or removing
any trademark, copyright or other notice from the
specification.
Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims
any, representations
or warranties, express or implied, regarding these
materials, including,
without limitation, any implied warranties of
merchantability or fitness
for a particular purpose or non-infringement of any
intellectual property.
Khronos Group makes no, and expressly disclaims
any, warranties, express
or implied, regarding the correctness, accuracy,
completeness, timeliness,
and reliability of these materials.
Under no circumstances will the Khronos Group, or
134
any of its Promoters,
Contributors or Members or their respective partners,
officers, directors,
employees, agents or representatives be liable for
any damages, whether
direct, indirect, special or consequential damages for
lost revenues,
lost profits, or otherwise, arising from or in connection
with these
Khronos and OpenMAX are trademarks of the
Khronos Group Inc.
opus
URL: http://git.xiph.org/?p=opus.git
Copyright 2001-2011 Xiph.Org, Skype Limited, Octasic,
Jean-Marc Valin, Timothy
B. Terriberry,
CSIRO, Gregory Maxwell,
Mark Borgerding,
Erik de Castro Lopo
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
are met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
- Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution.
- Neither the name of Internet Society, IETF or IETF
Trust, nor the
names of specific contributors, may be used to
endorse or promote
products derived from this software without specific
prior written
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER
OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Opus is subject to the royalty-free patent licenses
which are
specified at:
https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1524/
Microsoft Corporation:
https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1914/
Broadcom Corporation:
https://datatracker.ietf.org/ipr/1526/
OTS (OpenType Sanitizer)
URL: https://github.com/khaledhosny/ots.git
PLY (Python Lex-Yacc)
URL: http://www.dabeaz.com/ply/ply-3.4.tar.gz
PLY (Python Lex-Yacc)
Version 3.4
Protocol Buffers
URL: http://protobuf.googlecode.com/svn/trunk
135
Code generated by the Protocol Buffer compiler is
owned by the owner
of the input file used when generating it. This code is
not
standalone and requires a support library to be linked
with it. This
support library is itself covered by the above license.
Quick Color Management System
URL: https://github.com/jrmuizel/qcms/tree/v4
qcms
Copyright (C) 2009 Mozilla Corporation
Copyright (C) 1998-2007 Marti Maria
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the Software
is furnished to do so, subject to the following
conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included in
all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO
THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION
OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
re2 - an efficient, principled regular expression
library
URL: https://github.com/google/re2
sfntly
URL: https://github.com/googlei18n/sfntly
Skia
URL: https://skia.org/
-------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------
Some files under resources are under the following
license:
Unlimited Commercial Use
We try to make it clear that you may use all clipart
from Openclipart even for unlimited commercial use.
We believe that giving away our images is a great way
to share with the world our talents and that will come
back around in a better form.
May I Use Openclipart for?
We put together a small chart of as many possibilities
and questions we have heard from people asking
how they may use Openclipart. If you have an
additional question, please email
love@openclipart.org.
All Clipart are Released into the Public Domain.
Each artist at Openclipart releases all rights to the
images they share at Openclipart. The reason is so
that there is no friction in using and sharing images
authors make available at this website so that each
artist might also receive the same benefit in using
other artists clipart totally for any possible reason.
SMHasher
URL: http://code.google.com/p/smhasher/
Snappy: A fast compressor/decompressor
URL: http://google.github.io/snappy/
sqlite
URL: http://sqlite.org/
The author disclaims copyright to this source code.
In place of a legal notice, here is a blessing:
136
May you do good and not evil.
May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive
others.
May you share freely, never taking more than you
give.
tcmalloc
URL: http://gperftools.googlecode.com/
The USB ID Repository
URL: http://www.linux-usb.org/usb-ids.html
Copyright (c) 2012, Linux USB Project
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
o Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
o Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
o Neither the name of the Linux USB Project nor the
names of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
this software without specific prior written
permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
usrsctp
URL: http://github.com/sctplab/usrsctp
(Copied from the COPYRIGHT file of
https://code.google.com/p/sctp-
refimpl/source/browse/trunk/COPYRIGHT)
-------------------------------------------------
-------------------------------
Copyright (c) 2001, 2002 Cisco Systems, Inc.
Copyright (c) 2002-12 Randall R. Stewart
Copyright (c) 2002-12 Michael Tuexen
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions
are met:
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided
with the distribution.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR AND
CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
137
OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGE.
wayland
URL: http://wayland.freedesktop.org/
Copyright © 2008-2012 Kristian Høgsberg
Copyright © 2010-2012 Intel Corporation
Copyright © 2011 Benjamin Franzke
Copyright © 2012 Collabora, Ltd.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice (including the next
paragraph) shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
---
The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License
used by X.org:
http://cgit.freedesktop.org/xorg/xserver/tree/COPYIN
G
wayland-protocols
URL: http://wayland.freedesktop.org/
Copyright © 2008-2013 Kristian Høgsberg
Copyright © 2010-2013 Intel Corporation
Copyright © 2013 Rafael Antognolli
Copyright © 2013 Jasper St. Pierre
Copyright © 2014 Jonas Ådahl
Copyright © 2014 Jason Ekstrand
Copyright © 2014-2015 Collabora, Ltd.
Copyright © 2015 Red Hat Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining a
copy of this software and associated documentation
files (the "Software"),
to deal in the Software without restriction, including
without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense,
and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit
persons to whom the
Software is furnished to do so, subject to the
following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice (including the next
paragraph) shall be included in all copies or
substantial portions of the
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE
138
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING
FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER
DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
---
The above is the version of the MIT "Expat" License
used by X.org:
http://cgit.freedesktop.org/xorg/xserver/tree/COPYIN
G
Web Animations JS
URL: https://github.com/web-animations/web-
animations-js
WebRTC
URL: http://www.webrtc.org
Copyright (c) 2011, The WebRTC project authors. All
rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in
the documentation and/or other materials
provided with the
distribution.
* Neither the name of Google nor the names of its
contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software
without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
x86inc
URL:
http://git.videolan.org/?p=x264.git;a=blob;f=common/
x86/x86inc.asm
;*********************************************************
********************
;* x86inc.asm
;*********************************************************
********************
;* Copyright (C) 2005-2011 x264 project
;*
;* Authors: Loren Merritt <lorenm@u.washington.edu>
;* Anton Mitrofanov
<BugMaster@narod.ru>
139
;* Jason Garrett-Glaser
<darkshikari@gmail.com>
;*
;* Permission to use, copy, modify, and/or distribute
this software for any
;* purpose with or without fee is hereby granted,
provided that the above
;* copyright notice and this permission notice appear
in all copies.
;*
;* THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND THE
AUTHOR DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
;* WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE INCLUDING
ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
;* MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT
SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR
;* ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES
;* WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE,
DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN
;* ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER
TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF
;* OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
;*********************************************************
********************
; This is a header file for the x264ASM assembly
language, which uses
; NASM/YASM syntax combined with a large number
of macros to provide easy
; abstraction between different calling conventions
(x86_32, win64, linux64).
; It also has various other useful features to simplify
writing the kind of
; DSP functions that are most often used in x264.
; Unlike the rest of x264, this file is available under an
ISC license, as it
; has significant usefulness outside of x264 and we
want it to be available
; to the largest audience possible. Of course, if you
modify it for your own
; purposes to add a new feature, we strongly
encourage contributing a patch
; as this feature might be useful for others as well.
Send patches or ideas
; to x264-devel@videolan.org .
zlib
URL: http://zlib.net/
/* zlib.h -- interface of the 'zlib' general purpose
compression library
version 1.2.4, March 14th, 2010
Copyright (C) 1995-2010 Jean-loup Gailly and Mark
Adler
This software is provided 'as-is', without any
express or implied
warranty. In no event will the authors be held
liable for any damages
arising from the use of this software.
Permission is granted to anyone to use this
software for any purpose,
including commercial applications, and to alter it
and redistribute it
freely, subject to the following restrictions:
1. The origin of this software must not be
misrepresented; you must not
claim that you wrote the original software. If
you use this software
in a product, an acknowledgment in the product
documentation would be
appreciated but is not required.
2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked
as such, and must not be
misrepresented as being the original software.
3. This notice may not be removed or altered from
any source distribution.
Jean-loup Gailly
Mark Adler
*/
url_parse
URL: http://mxr.mozilla.org/comm-central/source/m
ozilla/netwerk/base/src/nsURLParsers.cpp
140
Copyright 2007, Google Inc.
All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer
in the documentation and/or other materials provided
with the
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
of its
contributors may be used to endorse or promote
products derived from
this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------------
The file url_parse.cc is based on nsURLParsers.cc
from Mozilla. This file is
licensed separately as follows:
The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is distributed
on an "AS IS" basis,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express
or implied. See the License
for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
The Original Code is mozilla.org code.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
Netscape Communications Corporation.
Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 1998
the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s):
Darin Fisher (original author)
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1 or
later (the "LGPL"),
in which case the provisions of the GPL or the LGPL
are applicable instead
of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
decision by deleting the provisions above and replace
141
them with the notice
and other provisions required by the GPL or the LGPL.
If you do not delete
the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
V8 JavaScript Engine
URL: http://code.google.com/p/v8
This license applies to all parts of V8 that are not
externally
maintained libraries. The externally maintained
libraries used by V8
are:
- PCRE test suite, located in
test/mjsunit/third_party/regexp-pcre/regexp-
pcre.js. This is based on the
test suite from PCRE-7.3, which is copyrighted by
the University
of Cambridge and Google, Inc. The copyright
notice and license
are embedded in regexp-pcre.js.
- Layout tests, located in
test/mjsunit/third_party/object-keys. These are
based on layout tests from webkit.org which are
copyrighted by
Apple Computer, Inc. and released under a
3-clause BSD license.
- Strongtalk assembler, the basis of the files
assembler-arm-inl.h,
assembler-arm.cc, assembler-arm.h, assembler-
ia32-inl.h,
assembler-ia32.cc, assembler-ia32.h, assembler-
x64-inl.h,
assembler-x64.cc, assembler-x64.h, assembler-
mips-inl.h,
assembler-mips.cc, assembler-mips.h,
assembler.cc and assembler.h.
This code is copyrighted by Sun Microsystems
Inc. and released
under a 3-clause BSD license.
- Valgrind client API header, located at
third_party/valgrind/valgrind.h
This is release under the BSD license.
These libraries have their own licenses; we
recommend you read them,
as their terms may differ from the terms below.
Further license information can be found in LICENSE
files located in
sub-directories.
Copyright 2014, the V8 project authors. All rights
reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce
the above
copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided
with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Google Inc. nor the names
of its
contributors may be used to endorse or
promote products derived
from this software without specific prior
written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS
"AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
142
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,
STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE
OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
fdlibm
URL: http://www.netlib.org/fdlibm/
Copyright (C) 1993-2004 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
All rights reserved.
Developed at SunSoft, a Sun Microsystems, Inc.
business.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this
software is freely granted, provided that this notice
is preserved.
Strongtalk
URL: http://www.strongtalk.org/
Copyright (c) 1994-2006 Sun Microsystems Inc.
All Rights Reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without
modification, are permitted provided that the
following conditions are
met:
- Redistributions of source code must retain the
above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
- Redistribution in binary form must reproduce the
above copyright
notice, this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other materials provided with
the distribution.
- Neither the name of Sun Microsystems or the names
of contributors may
be used to endorse or promote products derived from
this software without
specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS
IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY
AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL
THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR
PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Extra bundled binaries
name License
libcap
URL: https://sites.google.com/site/fullycapable/
Unless otherwise *explicitly* stated, the following text
describes the
licensed conditions under which the contents of this
libcap release
may be used and distributed:
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
143
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of
libcap, with
or without modification, are permitted provided that
the following
conditions are met:
notice, and this entire permission notice in its
entirety,
including the disclaimer of warranties.
copyright notices, this list of conditions, and the
following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided
with the distribution.
products derived from this software without their
specific prior
written permission.
ALTERNATIVELY, this product may be distributed
under the terms of the
GNU General Public License (v2.0 - see below), in
which case the
provisions of the GNU GPL are required INSTEAD OF
the above restrictions.
(This clause is necessary due to a potential conflict
between the GNU GPL and the restrictions contained
in a BSD-style
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR(S) BE LIABLE FOR
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE
USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
-------------------------------------------------
------------------------
libnsspem
URL: https://git.fedorahosted.org/cgit/nss-pem.git
/* ***** BEGIN LICENSE BLOCK *****
* Version: MPL 1.1/GPL 2.0/LGPL 2.1
*
* The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla
Public License Version
* 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except
in compliance with
* the License. You may obtain a copy of the License
at
* http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
*
* Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS" basis,
* WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either
express or implied. See the License
* for the specific language governing rights and
limitations under the
* License.
*
* The Original Code is the Netscape security libraries.
*
* The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
* Netscape Communications Corporation.
* Portions created by the Initial Developer are
Copyright (C) 1994-2000
* the Initial Developer. All Rights Reserved.
*
* Contributor(s):
* Rob Crittenden (rcritten@redhat.com)
*
* Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used
under the terms of
* either the GNU General Public License Version 2 or
later (the "GPL"), or
* the GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1
or later (the "LGPL"),
144
* in which case the provisions of the GPL or the
LGPL are applicable instead
* of those above. If you wish to allow use of your
version of this file only
* under the terms of either the GPL or the LGPL, and
not to allow others to
* use your version of this file under the terms of the
MPL, indicate your
* decision by deleting the provisions above and
replace them with the notice
* and other provisions required by the GPL or the
LGPL. If you do not delete
* the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file under
* the terms of any one of the MPL, the GPL or the
LGPL.
* ***** END LICENSE BLOCK ***** */
Return to Documentation index.
© Opera TV AS 2015. Confidential information of
Opera TV.
BSD LICENSE
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms,
with or without modification, are permitted provided
that the following conditions are met:
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS
AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
______________________________
MIT LICENSE
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any
person obtaining
a copy of this software and associated
documentation files (the
"Software"), to deal in the Software without
restriction, including
without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,
merge, publish,
distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the
Software, and to
permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to
do so, subject to
the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission
notice shall be included
in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT
HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT,
TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR
IN CONNECTION WITH THE
SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN
THE SOFTWARE.
_____________________________
This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your
convenience. In case of
any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in
the file png.h that is
included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall
prevail.
COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE:
If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices
immediately following
this sentence.
This code is released under the libpng license.
145
libpng versions 1.2.6, August 15, 2004, through 1.4.1,
February 25, 2010, are
Copyright (c) 2004, 2006-2007 Glenn Randers-
Pehrson, and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.2.5
with the following individual added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Cosmin Truta
libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.2.5 -
October 3, 2002, are
Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson,
and are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-1.0.6
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors
Simon-Pierre Cadieux
Eric S. Raymond
Gilles Vollant
and with the following additions to the disclaimer:
There is no warranty against interference with your
enjoyment of the
library or against infringement. There is no
warranty that our
efforts or the library will fulfill any of your
particular purposes
or needs. This library is provided with all faults,
and the entire
risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy,
and effort is with
the user.
libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6,
March 20, 2000, are
Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and
are
distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.96,
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
Tom Lane
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
Willem van Schaik
libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May
1997, are
Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger
Distributed according to the same disclaimer and
license as libpng-0.88,
with the following individuals added to the list of
Contributing Authors:
John Bowler
Kevin Bracey
Sam Bushell
Magnus Holmgren
Greg Roelofs
Tom Tanner
libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January
1996, are
Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42,
Inc.
For the purposes of this copyright and license,
"Contributing Authors"
is defined as the following set of individuals:
Andreas Dilger
Dave Martindale
Guy Eric Schalnat
Paul Schmidt
Tim Wegner
The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The
Contributing Authors
and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed
or implied,
including, without limitation, the warranties of
merchantability and of
fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors
and Group 42, Inc.
assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental,
special, exemplary,
146
or consequential damages, which may result from the
use of the PNG
Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of
such damage.
Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify,
and distribute this
source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose,
without fee, subject
to the following restrictions:
be misrepresented as being the original source.
source or altered source distribution.
The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc.
specifically permit, without
fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a
component to
supporting the PNG file format in commercial
products. If you use this
source code in a product, acknowledgment is not
required but would be
A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for
convenient use in "about"
boxes and the like:
printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL));
Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is
supplied in the
files "pngbar.png.jpg" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and
"pngnow.png.jpg" (98x31).
Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI
Certified Open Source is a
certification mark of the Open Source Initiative.
Glenn Randers-Pehrson
glennrp at users.sourceforge.net
February 25, 2010
_____________________________
This software is based in part on the work of the
FreeType Team.
----------------------
The FreeType Project
LICENSE
----------------------------
2006-Jan-27
Copyright 1996-2002,
2006 by
David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and
Werner Lemberg
Introduction
============
The FreeType Project is distributed in several
archive packages;
some of them may contain, in addition to the
FreeType font engine,
various tools and contributions which rely on, or
relate to, the
FreeType Project.
This license applies to all files found in such
packages, and
which do not fall under their own explicit
license. The license
affects thus the FreeType font engine,
the test programs,
documentation and makefiles, at the very least.
This license was inspired by the BSD,
Artistic, and IJG
(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all
encourage inclusion
and use of free software in commercial and
freeware products
alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:
o We don't promise that this software works.
However, we will be
interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is'
147
distribution)
o You can use this software for whatever you
want, in parts or
full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-
free' usage)
o You may not pretend that you wrote this
software. If you use
it, or only parts of it, in a program, you
must acknowledge
somewhere in your documentation that
you have used the
FreeType code. (`credits')
We specifically permit and encourage the
inclusion of this
software, with or without modifications, in
commercial products.
We disclaim all warranties covering The
FreeType Project and
assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.
Finally, many people asked us for a
preferred form for a
credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this
license. We thus
encourage you to use the following text:
"""
Portions of this software are copyright ɠ<year>
The FreeType
Project (www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.
"""
Please replace <year> with the value from the
FreeType version you
actually use.
Legal Terms
===========
--------------
Throughout this license, the terms `package',
`FreeType Project',
and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of
files originally
distributed by the authors (David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and
Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they
named as alpha,
beta or final release.
`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the
project, where
`using' is a generic term including compiling the
project's source
code as well as linking it to form a `program' or
`executable'.
This program is referred to as `a program
using the FreeType
engine'.
This license applies to all files distributed in
the original
FreeType Project, including all source
code, binaries and
documentation, unless otherwise stated in
the file in its
original, unmodified form as distributed in the
original archive.
If you are unsure whether or not a particular file
is covered by
this license, you must contact us to verify this.
The FreeType Project is copyright (C) 1996-2000
by David Turner,
Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights
reserved except as
specified below.
--------------
THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS'
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE
AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE
148
USE OR THE INABILITY TO
USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.
-----------------
This license grants a worldwide, royalty-
free, perpetual and
irrevocable right and license to use, execute,
perform, compile,
display, copy, create derivative works of,
distribute and
sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source
and object code
forms) and derivative works thereof for any
purpose; and to
authorize others to exercise some or all of the
rights granted
herein, subject to the following conditions:
o Redistribution of source code must retain
this license file
(`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions,
deletions or changes to
the original files must be clearly indicated in
accompanying
documentation. The copyright notices
of the unaltered,
original files must be preserved in all
copies of source
files.
o Redistribution in binary form must provide a
disclaimer that
states that the software is based in part of
the work of the
FreeType Team, in the distribution
documentation. We also
encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType
web page in your
documentation, though this isn't mandatory.
These conditions apply to any software derived
from or based on
the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified
files. If you use
our work, you must acknowledge us. However,
no fee need be paid
to us.
--------------
Neither the FreeType authors and contributors
nor you shall use
the name of the other for commercial, advertising,
or promotional
purposes without specific prior written permission.
We suggest, but do not require, that you use one
or more of the
following phrases to refer to this software in your
documentation
or advertising materials: `FreeType Project',
`FreeType Engine',
`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.
As you have not signed this license, you are
not required to
accept it. However, as the FreeType
Project is copyrighted
material, only this license, or another one
contracted with the
authors, grants you the right to use, distribute,
and modify it.
Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying
the FreeType
Project, you indicate that you understand and
accept all the terms
of this license.
-----------
There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:
o freetype@nongnu.org
Discusses general use and applications of
FreeType, as well as
future and wanted additions to the library
and distribution.
If you are looking for support, start in this
list if you
haven't found anything to help you in the
documentation.
o freetype-devel@nongnu.org
149
Discusses bugs, as well as engine
internals, design issues,
specific licenses, porting, etc.
Our home page can be found at
http://www.freetype.org
--- end of FTL.TXT ---
_____________________________
MOZILLA PUBLIC
LICENSE
Version 1.1
---------------
1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or
otherwise making the
Covered Code available to a third party.
1.1. "Contributor" means each entity that creates
or contributes to
the creation of Modifications.
1.2. "Contributor Version" means the
combination of the Original
Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor,
and the Modifications
made by that particular Contributor.
1.3. "Covered Code" means the Original Code or
Modifications or the
combination of the Original Code and
Modifications, in each case
including portions thereof.
1.4. "Electronic Distribution Mechanism" means
a mechanism generally
accepted in the software development
community for the electronic
transfer of data.
1.5. "Executable" means Covered Code in any
form other than Source
Code.
1.6. "Initial Developer" means the individual or
entity identified
as the Initial Developer in the Source Code
notice required by Exhibit
A.
1.7. "Larger Work" means a work which
combines Covered Code or
portions thereof with code not governed by the
terms of this License.
1.8. "License" means this document.
1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to
grant, to the maximum
extent possible, whether at the time of the
initial grant or
subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights
conveyed herein.
1.9. "Modifications" means any addition to or
deletion from the
substance or structure of either the Original
Code or any previous
Modifications. When Covered Code is released
as a series of files, a
Modification is:
A. Any addition to or deletion from the
contents of a file
containing Original Code or previous
Modifications.
B. Any new file that contains any part of
the Original Code or
previous Modifications.
1.10. "Original Code" means Source Code of
computer software code
which is described in the Source Code notice
required by Exhibit A as
Original Code, and which, at the time of its
release under this
License is not already Covered Code governed
150
by this License.
1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent
claim(s), now owned or
hereafter acquired, including without
limitation, method, process,
and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable
by grantor.
1.11. "Source Code" means the preferred form of
the Covered Code for
making modifications to it, including all modules
it contains, plus
any associated interface definition files, scripts
used to control
compilation and installation of an Executable,
or source code
differential comparisons against either the
Original Code or another
well known, available Covered Code of the
Contributor's choice. The
Source Code can be in a compressed or
archival form, provided the
appropriate decompression or de-archiving
software is widely available
for no charge.
1.12. "You" (or "Your") means an individual or a
legal entity
exercising rights under, and complying with all
of the terms of, this
License or a future version of this License
issued under Section 6.1.
For legal entities, "You" includes any entity
which controls, is
controlled by, or is under common control with
You. For purposes of
this definition, "control" means (a) the power,
direct or indirect,
to cause the direction or management of such
entity, whether by
contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more
than fifty percent
(50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial
ownership of such
entity.
2.1. The Initial Developer Grant.
The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-
wide, royalty-free,
non-exclusive license, subject to third party
intellectual property
claims:
(a) under intellectual property rights
(other than patent or
trademark) Licensable by Initial
Developer to use, reproduce,
modify, display, perform, sublicense and
distribute the Original
Code (or portions thereof) with or
without Modifications, and/or
as part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patents Claims infringed by the
making, using or
selling of Original Code, to make, have
made, use, practice,
sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise
dispose of the
Original Code (or portions thereof).
(c) the licenses granted in this Section
2.1(a) and (b) are
effective on the date Initial Developer
first distributes
Original Code under the terms of this
License.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above,
no patent license is
granted: 1) for code that You delete from
the Original Code; 2)
separate from the Original Code; or 3)
for infringements caused
by: i) the modification of the Original
Code or ii) the
combination of the Original Code with
other software or devices.
2.2. Contributor Grant.
Subject to third party intellectual property
claims, each Contributor
hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free,
non-exclusive license
151
(a) under intellectual property rights
(other than patent or
trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to
use, reproduce, modify,
display, perform, sublicense and
distribute the Modifications
created by such Contributor (or portions
thereof) either on an
unmodified basis, with other
Modifications, as Covered Code
and/or as part of a Larger Work; and
(b) under Patent Claims infringed by the
making, using, or
selling of Modifications made by that
Contributor either alone
and/or in combination with its
Contributor Version (or portions
of such combination), to make, use, sell,
offer for sale, have
made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1)
Modifications made by that
Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2)
the combination of
Modifications made by that Contributor
with its Contributor
Version (or portions of such
combination).
(c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a)
and 2.2(b) are
effective on the date Contributor first
makes Commercial Use of
the Covered Code.
(d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b)
above, no patent license is
granted: 1) for any code that Contributor
has deleted from the
Contributor Version; 2) separate from
the Contributor Version;
3) for infringements caused by: i) third
party modifications of
Contributor Version or ii) the
combination of Modifications made
by that Contributor with other software
(except as part of the
Contributor Version) or other devices; or
4) under Patent Claims
infringed by Covered Code in the
absence of Modifications made by
that Contributor.
3.1. Application of License.
The Modifications which You create or to which
You contribute are
governed by the terms of this License, including
without limitation
Section 2.2. The Source Code version of
Covered Code may be
distributed only under the terms of this License
or a future version
of this License released under Section 6.1, and
You must include a
copy of this License with every copy of the
Source Code You
distribute. You may not offer or impose any
terms on any Source Code
version that alters or restricts the applicable
version of this
License or the recipients' rights hereunder.
However, You may include
an additional document offering the additional
rights described in
Section 3.5.
3.2. Availability of Source Code.
Any Modification which You create or to which
You contribute must be
made available in Source Code form under the
terms of this License
either on the same media as an Executable
version or via an accepted
Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to
whom you made an
Executable version available; and if made
available via Electronic
Distribution Mechanism, must remain available
for at least twelve (12)
months after the date it initially became
available, or at least six
(6) months after a subsequent version of that
particular Modification
has been made available to such recipients.
You are responsible for
ensuring that the Source Code version remains
152
available even if the
Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained
by a third party.
3.3. Description of Modifications.
You must cause all Covered Code to which You
contribute to contain a
file documenting the changes You made to
create that Covered Code and
the date of any change. You must include a
prominent statement that
the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly,
from Original
Code provided by the Initial Developer and
including the name of the
Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b)
in any notice in an
Executable version or related documentation in
which You describe the
origin or ownership of the Covered Code.
3.4. Intellectual Property Matters
(a) Third Party Claims.
If Contributor has knowledge that a
license under a third party's
intellectual property rights is required to
exercise the rights
granted by such Contributor under
Sections 2.1 or 2.2,
Contributor must include a text file with
the Source Code
distribution titled "LEGAL" which
describes the claim and the
party making the claim in sufficient detail
that a recipient will
know whom to contact. If Contributor
obtains such knowledge after
the Modification is made available as
described in Section 3.2,
Contributor shall promptly modify the
LEGAL file in all copies
Contributor makes available thereafter
and shall take other steps
(such as notifying appropriate mailing
lists or newsgroups)
reasonably calculated to inform those
who received the Covered
Code that new knowledge has been
obtained.
(b) Contributor APIs.
If Contributor's Modifications include an
application programming
interface and Contributor has knowledge
of patent licenses which
are reasonably necessary to implement
that API, Contributor must
also include this information in the
LEGAL file.
(c) Representations.
Contributor represents that, except as
disclosed pursuant to
Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor
believes that Contributor's
Modifications are Contributor's original
creation(s) and/or
Contributor has sufficient rights to grant
the rights conveyed by
this License.
3.5. Required Notices.
You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in
each file of the Source
Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in
a particular Source
Code file due to its structure, then You must
include such notice in a
location (such as a relevant directory) where a
user would be likely
to look for such a notice. If You created one or
more Modification(s)
You may add your name as a Contributor to the
notice described in
Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License
in any documentation
for the Source Code where You describe
recipients' rights or ownership
rights relating to Covered Code. You may
choose to offer, and to
charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or
liability
obligations to one or more recipients of
Covered Code. However, You
may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on
behalf of the Initial
153
Developer or any Contributor. You must make it
absolutely clear than
any such warranty, support, indemnity or
liability obligation is
offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to
indemnify the Initial
Developer and every Contributor for any
liability incurred by the
Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result
of warranty,
support, indemnity or liability terms You offer.
3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions.
You may distribute Covered Code in Executable
form only if the
requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met
for that Covered Code,
and if You include a notice stating that the
Source Code version of
the Covered Code is available under the terms
of this License,
including a description of how and where You
have fulfilled the
obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be
conspicuously included
in any notice in an Executable version, related
documentation or
collateral in which You describe recipients'
rights relating to the
Covered Code. You may distribute the
Executable version of Covered
Code or ownership rights under a license of
Your choice, which may
contain terms different from this License,
provided that You are in
compliance with the terms of this License and
that the license for the
Executable version does not attempt to limit or
alter the recipient's
rights in the Source Code version from the rights
set forth in this
License. If You distribute the Executable version
under a different
license You must make it absolutely clear that
any terms which differ
from this License are offered by You alone, not
by the Initial
Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree
to indemnify the
Initial Developer and every Contributor for any
liability incurred by
the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a
result of any such
terms You offer.
3.7. Larger Works.
You may create a Larger Work by combining
Covered Code with other code
not governed by the terms of this License and
distribute the Larger
Work as a single product. In such a case, You
must make sure the
requirements of this License are fulfilled for the
Covered Code.
If it is impossible for You to comply with any of
the terms of this
License with respect to some or all of the
Covered Code due to
statute, judicial order, or regulation then You
must: (a) comply with
the terms of this License to the maximum extent
possible; and (b)
describe the limitations and the code they
affect. Such description
must be included in the LEGAL file described in
Section 3.4 and must
be included with all distributions of the Source
Code. Except to the
extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such
description must be
sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary
skill to be able to
understand it.
This License applies to code to which the Initial
Developer has
attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related
Covered Code.
6.1. New Versions.
Netscape Communications Corporation
("Netscape") may publish revised
and/or new versions of the License from time to
time. Each version
154
will be given a distinguishing version number.
6.2. Effect of New Versions.
Once Covered Code has been published under
a particular version of the
License, You may always continue to use it
under the terms of that
version. You may also choose to use such
Covered Code under the terms
of any subsequent version of the License
published by Netscape. No one
other than Netscape has the right to modify the
terms applicable to
Covered Code created under this License.
6.3. Derivative Works.
If You create or use a modified version of this
License (which you may
only do in order to apply it to code which is not
already Covered Code
governed by this License), You must (a) rename
Your license so that
the phrases "Mozilla", "MOZILLAPL", "MOZPL",
"Netscape",
"MPL", "NPL" or any confusingly similar phrase
do not appear in your
license (except to note that your license differs
from this License)
and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your
version of the license
contains terms which differ from the Mozilla
Public License and
Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of
the Initial
Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the
notice described in
Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to
be modifications of
this License.)
COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS
LICENSE ON AN "AS IS" BASIS,
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING,
WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT
THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF
DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGING.
THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE
IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE
PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT,
YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY
OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE
COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR
OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER
OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL
PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF
ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED
HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER.
8.1. This License and the rights granted
hereunder will terminate
automatically if You fail to comply with terms
herein and fail to cure
such breach within 30 days of becoming aware
of the breach. All
sublicenses to the Covered Code which are
properly granted shall
survive any termination of this License.
Provisions which, by their
nature, must remain in effect beyond the
termination of this License
shall survive.
8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a
patent infringement
claim (excluding declatory judgment actions)
against Initial Developer
or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or
Contributor against whom
You file such action is referred to as
"Participant") alleging that:
(a) such Participant's Contributor Version
directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then any and all rights
granted by such
Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2
of this License
shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant
terminate prospectively,
unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice
You either: (i)
agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually
agreeable reasonable
155
royalty for Your past and future use of
Modifications made by such
Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim
with respect to
the Contributor Version against such
Participant. If within 60 days
of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment
arrangement are not
mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties
or the litigation claim
is not withdrawn, the rights granted by
Participant to You under
Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate
at the expiration of
the 60 day notice period specified above.
(b) any software, hardware, or device, other
than such Participant's
Contributor Version, directly or indirectly
infringes any patent, then
any rights granted to You by such Participant
under Sections 2.1(b)
and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date
You first made, used,
sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications
made by that
Participant.
8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim
against Participant
alleging that such Participant's Contributor
Version directly or
indirectly infringes any patent where such claim
is resolved (such as
by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of
patent
infringement litigation, then the reasonable
value of the licenses
granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1
or 2.2 shall be taken
into account in determining the amount or
value of any payment or
license.
8.4. In the event of termination under Sections
8.1 or 8.2 above,
all end user license agreements (excluding
distributors and resellers)
which have been validly granted by You or any
distributor hereunder
prior to termination shall survive termination.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO
LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR
OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL
DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR
ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE,
OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES,
BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY
CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL,
WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR
MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER
COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF
SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN
INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF
LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR
DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY
RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S
NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW
PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO
THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU.
The Covered Code is a "commercial item," as
that term is defined in
48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of
"commercial computer
software" and "commercial computer software
documentation," as such
terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995).
Consistent with 48
C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through
227.7202-4 (June 1995),
all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered
Code with only those
rights set forth herein.
This License represents the complete agreement
156
concerning subject
matter hereof. If any provision of this License is
held to be
unenforceable, such provision shall be
reformed only to the extent
necessary to make it enforceable. This License
shall be governed by
California law provisions (except to the extent
applicable law, if
any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-
of-law provisions.
With respect to disputes in which at least one
party is a citizen of,
or an entity chartered or registered to do
business in the United
States of America, any litigation relating to this
License shall be
subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts
of the Northern
District of California, with venue lying in Santa
Clara County,
California, with the losing party responsible for
costs, including
without limitation, court costs and reasonable
attorneys' fees and
expenses. The application of the United Nations
Convention on
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is
expressly excluded.
Any law or regulation which provides that the
language of a contract
shall be construed against the drafter shall not
apply to this
License.
As between Initial Developer and the
Contributors, each party is
responsible for claims and damages arising,
directly or indirectly,
out of its utilization of rights under this License
and You agree to
work with Initial Developer and Contributors to
distribute such
responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing
herein is intended or
shall be deemed to constitute any admission of
liability.
Initial Developer may designate portions of the
Covered Code as
"Multiple-Licensed". "Multiple-Licensed"
means that the Initial
Developer permits you to utilize portions of the
Covered Code under
Your choice of the NPL or the alternative
licenses, if any, specified
by the Initial Developer in the file described in
Exhibit A.
EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.
``The contents of this file are subject to the
Mozilla Public License
Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this
file except in
compliance with the License. You may obtain a
copy of the License at
http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/
Software distributed under the License is
distributed on an "AS IS"
basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
either express or implied. See the
License for the specific language governing
rights and limitations
under the License.
The Original Code is
______________________________________.
The Initial Developer of the Original Code is
________________________.
Portions created by ______________________
are Copyright (C) ______
_______________________. All Rights Reserved.
Contributor(s):
______________________________________.
Alternatively, the contents of this file may be
used under the terms
of the _____ license (the "[___] License"), in
which case the
provisions of [______] License are applicable
instead of those
157
above. If you wish to allow use of your version
of this file only
under the terms of the [____] License and not to
allow others to use
your version of this file under the MPL, indicate
your decision by
deleting the provisions above and replace
them with the notice and
other provisions required by the [___] License.
If you do not delete
the provisions above, a recipient may use your
version of this file
under either the MPL or the [___] License."
[NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ
slightly from the text of
the notices in the Source Code files of the
Original Code. You should
use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text
found in the
Original Code Source Code for Your
Modifications.]
158
22
Specifications
22.1
Environmental
European Energy Label
The European Energy Label informs you on the
energy efficiency class of this product. The greener
the energy efficiency class of this product is, the
lower the energy it consumes.
On the label, you can find the energy efficiency class,
the average power consumption of this product in use
and the average energy consumption for 1 year. You
can also find the power consumption values for this
product on the Philips website for your country
at www.philips.com/TV
Product Fiche
55POS9002
• Energy Efficiency Class : B
• Visible Screen Size : 139 cm / 55 inch
• On Mode Power Consumption (W) : 150 W
• Annual Energy Consumption (kWh) * : 219 kWh
• Standby Power Consumption (W) ** : 0.30 W
• Display Resolution (Pixels) : 3840 x 2160p
* Energy consumption kWh per year, based on the
power consumption of the television operating 4
hours per day for 365 days. The actual energy
consumption depends on how the television is used.
** When the TV is turned off with the remote control
and no function is active.
End of Use
Disposal of your old product and batteries
Your product is designed and manufactured with high
quality materials and components, which can be
recycled and reused.
When this crossed-out wheeled bin symbol is
attached to a product it means that the product is
covered by the European Directive 2012/19/EU.
Please inform yourself about the local separate
collection system for electrical and electronic
products.
Please act according to your local rules and do not
dispose of your old products with your normal
household waste. Correct disposal of your old
product helps to prevent potential negative
consequences for the environment and human
health.
Your product contains batteries covered by the
European Directive 2006/66/EC, which cannot be
disposed with normal household waste.
Please find out for yourself about the local rules on
separate collection of batteries because correct
disposal will help to prevent negative consequences
for the environment and human health.
22.2
Power
Product specifications are subject to change without
notice. For more specification details of this product,
see www.philips.com/support
Power
• Mains power : AC 220-240V +/-10%
• Ambient temperature : 5°C to 35°C
• Power saving features : Eco mode, Picture mute (for
radio), Auto switch-off timer, Eco settings menu.
For power consumption information, see
chapter Product Fiche.
The power rating stated on the product typeplate is
the power consumption for this product during
normal household use (IEC 62087 Ed.2). The
maximum power rating, stated between brackets, is
used for electrical safety (IEC 60065 Ed. 7.2).
22.3
Operating System
Android OS :
Android Nougat 7
159
22.4
Reception
• Aerial input : 75 ohm coaxial (IEC75)
• Tuner bands : Hyperband, S-Channel, UHF, VHF
• DVB : DVB-T2, DVB-C (cable) QAM
• Analogue video playback : SECAM, PAL
• Digital video playback : MPEG2 SD/HD (ISO/IEC
13818-2), MPEG4 SD/HD (ISO/IEC 14496-10), HEVC*
• Digital audio playback (ISO/IEC 13818-3)
• Satellite aerial input : 75 ohm F-type
• Input frequency range : 950 to 2150MHz
• Input level range : 25 to 65 dBm
• DVB-S/S2 QPSK, symbol rate 2 to 45M symbols,
SCPC and MCPC
• LNB : DiSEqC 1.0, 1 to 4 LNBs supported, Polarity
selection 14/18V, Band selection 22kHz, Tone burst
mode, LNB current 300mA max
* Only for DVB-T2, DVB-S2
22.5
Display Type
Diagonal screen size
• 139 cm / 55 inch
Display resolution
• 3840 x 2160
22.6
Display Input Resolution
Video formats
Resolution — Refresh rate
• 480i - 60 Hz
• 480p - 60 Hz
• 576i - 50 Hz
• 576p - 50 Hz
• 720p - 50 Hz, 60 Hz
• 1080i - 50 Hz, 60 Hz
• 1080p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz
• 2160p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Computer formats
Resolutions (amongst others)
• 640 x 480p - 60 Hz
• 800 x 600p - 60 Hz
• 1024 x 768p - 60 Hz
• 1280 x 768p - 60 Hz
• 1360 x 765p - 60 Hz
• 1360 x 768p - 60 Hz
• 1280 x 1024p - 60 Hz
• 1920 x 1080p - 60 Hz
• 3840 x 2160p - 24 Hz, 25 Hz, 30 Hz, 50 Hz, 60 Hz
22.7
Connectivity
TV Side
• Common Interface slot: CI+/CAM
• USB 1 - USB 2.0
• USB 2 - USB 3.0
• Headphones - Stereo mini-jack 3.5mm
• HDMI 1 in - ARC - MHL - Ultra HD - HDR
• HDMI 2 in - ARC - Ultra HD - HDR
TV Bottom
• Audio out - Optical Toslink
• Network LAN - RJ45
• YPbPr, L/R
• HDMI 4 in - ARC
• HDMI 3 in - ARC
• Antenna (75 ohm)
• YPbPr, L/R
• Satellite tuner
22.8
Sound
• Output power (RMS) : 30W
• Dolby Audio
• DTS Premium Sound ™
22.9
Multimedia
Connections
• USB 2.0 / USB 3.0
• Ethernet LAN RJ-45
• Wi-Fi 802.11a/b/g/n/ac (built-in)
• BT2.1 with EDR & BT4.0 with BLE (* Your TV doesn't
support Bluetooth subwoofer and Bluetooth
speakers)
Supported USB file systems
• FAT 16, FAT 32, NTFS
Playback formats
• Video Codecs : AVI, MKV, H264/MPEG-4 AVC,
MPEG-1, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, WMV9/VC1, HEVC
• Audio Codecs : AAC, MP3, WAV, WMA (v2 up to
v9.2), WMA-PRO (v9 and v10)
• Subtitles :
– Formats : SRT, SUB, TXT, SMI
– Character encodings : UTF-8, Central Europe and
Eastern Europe (Windows-1250), Cyrillic
(Windows-1251), Greek (Windows-1253), Turkish
(Windows-1254), Western Europe (Windows-1252)
• Image Codecs : JPEG
• Limitations :
– Maximum supported total bit rate for a media file is
30Mbps.
– Maximum supported video bit rate for a media file
160
is 20Mbps.
– MPEG-4 AVC (H.264) is supported up to High
Profile @ L5.1.
– H.265 (HEVC) is supported upto Main / Main 10
Profile up to Level 5.1
– VC-1 is supported up to Advanced Profile @ L3.
Supported media server software (DMS)
• You can use any DLNA V1.5 certified media server
software (DMS class).
• You can use the Philips TV Remote app (iOS and
Android) on mobile devices.
Performance may vary, depending on the capabilities
of the mobile device and the software used.
161
23
Help and Support
23.1
Register your TV
Register your TV and enjoy a range of benefits
including full support (including downloads),
privileged access to information about new products,
exclusive offers and discounts, the chance to win
prizes and even participate in special surveys about
new releases.
Go to www.philips.com/welcome
23.2
Using Help
This TV offers help on screen .
Open Help
Press the key (blue) to open Help immediately.
Help will open on the chapter that is most relevant to
what you are doing or what is selected on TV. To look
up topics alphabetically, press the colour
key Keywords .
To read the Help as a book, select Book.
You can also open Help in the Home menu or
TV menu.
Before you execute the Help instructions, close Help.
To close Help, press the colour key Close .
For some activities, like Text (Teletext), the colour
keys have specific functions and cannot open Help.
TV Help on your tablet, smartphone or computer
To carry out extended sequences of instructions more
easily, you can download the TV Help in PDF format
to read on your smartphone, tablet or
computer. Alternatively, you can print the relevant
Help page from your computer.
To download the Help (user manual) go
to www.philips.com/support
23.3
Troubleshooting
Switch On and Remote Control
The TV does not switch on
• Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
Wait for one minute then reconnect it.
• Make sure that the power cable is securely
connected.
Creaking sound at startup or switch off
When you are switching the TV on, off or to standby,
you hear a creaking sound from the TV chassis. The
creaking sound is due to the normal expansion and
contraction of the TV as it cools and warms up. This
does not affect performance.
TV does not respond to the remote control
The TV requires some time to start up. During this
time, the TV does not respond to the remote control
or TV controls. This is normal behaviour.
If the TV continues to be unresponsive to the remote
control, you can check if the remote control is working
by means of a mobile phone camera. Put the phone
in camera mode and point the remote control to the
camera lens. If you press any key on the remote
control and you notice the infra red LED flicker
through the camera, the remote control is working.
The TV needs to be checked.
If you do not notice the flickering, the remote control
might be broken or its batteries are low.
This method of checking the remote control is not
possible with remote controls which are wirelessly
paired with the TV.
The TV goes back to standby after showing the
Philips startup screen
When the TV is in standby, a Philips startup screen is
displayed, then the TV returns to standby mode. This
is normal behaviour. When the TV is disconnected
and reconnected to the power supply, the startup
screen is displayed at the next startup. To switch on
the TV from standby, press on the remote control
or on the TV.
The standby light keeps on blinking
Disconnect the power cable from the power outlet.
Wait 5 minutes before you reconnect the power
cable. If the blinking reoccurs, contact Philips TV
Consumer Care.
Channels
No digital channels found during the installation
See the technical specifications to make sure that
your TV supports DVB-T or DVB-C in your country.
Make sure that all cables are properly connected and
that the correct network is selected.
Previously installed channels are not in the channel
162
list
Make sure that the correct channel list is selected.
Picture
No picture / distorted picture
• Make sure that the antenna is properly connected to
the TV.
• Make sure that the correct device is selected as the
display source.
• Make sure that the external device or source is
properly connected.
Sound but no picture
• Make sure that the picture settings are set correctly.
Poor antenna reception
• Make sure that the antenna is properly connected to
the TV.
• Loud speakers, unearthed audio devices, neon
lights, high buildings and other large objects can
influence reception quality. If possible, try to improve
the reception quality by changing the antenna
direction or moving devices away from the TV.
• If reception on only one channel is poor, fine-tune
this channel with Manual Installation.
Poor picture from a device
• Make sure that the device is connected properly.
• Make sure that the picture settings are set correctly.
Picture settings change after a while
Make sure that Location is set to Home . You can
change and save settings in this mode.
A commercial banner appears
Make sure that Location is set to Home.
Picture does not fit the screen
Change to a different picture format.
Picture position is incorrect
Picture signals from some devices may not fit the
screen correctly. Check the signal output of the
connected device.
Computer picture is not stable
Make sure that your PC uses the supported resolution
and refresh rate.
Sound
No sound or poor sound quality
If no audio signal is detected, the TV automatically
switches the audio output off — this does not indicate
malfunction.
• Make sure that the sound settings are correctly set.
• Make sure that all cables are properly connected.
• Make sure that the volume is not muted or set to
zero.
• Make sure that the TV audio output is connected to
the audio input on the Home Theatre System.
Sound should be heard from the HTS speakers.
• Some devices may require you to manually enable
HDMI audio output. If HDMI audio is already enabled,
but you still do not hear audio, try changing the digital
audio format of the device to PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation). Refer to the documentation
accompanying your device for instructions.
HDMI and USB
HDMI
• Note that HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection) support can delay the time taken for a TV
to display content from an HDMI device.
• If the TV does not recognise the HDMI device and
no picture is displayed, switch the source from one
device to another and back again.
• If the picture and sound of a device connected
to HDMI 3 or HDMI 4 is distorted, connect the
device to HDMI 1 or HDMI 2 on this TV.
• If the picture and sound of a device connected with
HDMI is distorted, check if a different HDMI Ultra
HD setting can solve this problem. In Help, press the
colour key Keywords and look up HDMI Ultra
HD.
• If there are intermittent sound disruptions, make
sure that output settings from the HDMI device are
correct.
• If you use an HDMI-to-DVI adapter or HDMI-to-DVI
cable, make sure that an additional audio cable is
connected to AUDIO IN (mini-jack only), if available.
HDMI EasyLink does not work
• Make sure that your HDMI devices are HDMI-CEC
compatible. EasyLink features only work with devices
that are HDMI-CEC compatible.
No volume icon shown
• When an HDMI-CEC audio device is connected and
you use the TV Remote Control to adjust the volume
level from the device, this behaviour is normal.
Photos, videos and music from a USB device do not
show
• Make sure that the USB storage device is set to Mass
Storage Class compliant, as described in the storage
device's documentation.
• Make sure that the USB storage device is compatible
with the TV.
• Make sure that the audio and picture file formats are
supported by the TV.
Choppy playback of USB files
• The transfer performance of the USB storage device
may limit the data transfer rate to the TV which
causes poor playback.
163
23.4
Online Help
To solve any Philips TV related problem, you can
consult our online support. You can select your
language and enter your product model number.
Go to www.philips.com/support .
On the support site you can find your country's
telephone number to contact us as well as answers to
frequently asked questions (FAQs). In some countries,
you can chat with one of our collaborators and ask
your question directly or send a question by email.
You can download new TV software or the manual to
read on your computer.
23.5
Support and Repair
For support and repair, call the Consumer Care
hotline in your country. Our service engineers will take
care of a repair, if necessary.
Find the telephone number in the printed
documentation that came with the TV.
Or consult our
website www.philips.com/support and select your
country if needed.
TV model number and serial number
You might be asked to provide the TV product model
number and serial number. Find these numbers on
the packaging label or on the type label on the back
or bottom of the TV.
Warning
Do not attemp to repair the TV yourself. This may
cause severe injury, irrepairable damage to your TV or
void your warranty.
164
24
Safety and Care
24.1
Safety
Important
Read and understand all safety instructions before
you use the TV. If damage is caused by failure to
follow instructions, the warranty does not apply.
Risk of Electric Shock or Fire
• Never expose the TV to rain or water. Never place
liquid containers, such as vases, near the TV.
If liquids are spilt on or into the TV, disconnect the TV
from the power outlet immediately.
Contact Philips TV Consumer Care to have the TV
checked before use.
• Never expose the TV, remote control or batteries to
excessive heat. Never place them near burning
candles, naked flames or other heat sources,
including direct sunlight.
• Never insert objects into the ventilation slots or other
openings on the TV.
• Never place heavy objects on the power cord.
• Avoid force coming onto power plugs. Loose power
plugs can cause arcing or fire. Ensure that no strain is
exerted on the power cord when you swivel the TV
screen.
• To disconnect the TV from the mains power, the
power plug of the TV must be disconnected. When
disconnecting the power, always pull the power plug,
never the cord. Ensure that you have full access to
the power plug, power cord and outlet socket at all
times.
Risk of Injury or Damage to the TV
• Two people are required to lift and carry a TV that
weighs more than 25 kg or 55 lbs.
• If you mount the TV on a stand, only use the
supplied stand. Secure the stand to the TV tightly.
Place the TV on a flat, level surface that can support
the weight of the TV and the stand.
• When wall mounted, ensure that the wall mount can
safely bear the weight of the TV set. TP Vision bears
no responsibility for improper wall mounting that
results in accident, injury or damage.
• Parts of this product are made of glass. Handle with
care to avoid injury or damage.
Risk of damage to the TV !
Before you connect the TV to the power outlet,
ensure that the power voltage matches the value
printed on the back of the TV. Never connect the TV
to the power outlet if the voltage is different.
Risk of Injury to Children
Follow these precautions to prevent the TV from
toppling over and causing injury to children:
• Never place the TV on a surface covered by a cloth
or other material that can be pulled away.
• Ensure that no part of the TV hangs over the edge of
the mounting surface.
• Never place the TV on tall furniture, such as a
bookcase, without anchoring both the furniture and
TV to the wall or a suitable support.
• Teach children about the dangers of climbing on
furniture to reach the TV.
Risk of swallowing batteries !
The remote control may contain coin-type batteries
which can easily be swallowed by small children.
Keep these batteries out of reach of children at all
times.
Risk of Overheating
Never install the TV in a confined space. Always leave
a space of at least 10 cm or 4 inches around the TV
for ventilation. Ensure curtains or other objects never
cover the ventilation slots on the TV.
Lightning Storms
Disconnect the TV from the power outlet and antenna
before lightning storms.
During lightning storms, never touch any part of the
TV, power cord or antenna cable.
Risk of Hearing Damage
Avoid using earphones or headphones at high
volumes or for prolonged periods of time.
Low Temperatures
If the TV is transported in temperatures below 5°C or
41°F, unpack the TV and wait until the TV temperature
reaches room temperature before connecting the TV
to the power outlet.
165
Humidity
In rare occasions, depending on temperature and
humidity, minor condensation can occur on the inside
of the TV glass front (on some models). To prevent
this, do not expose the TV to direct sunlight, heat or
extreme humidity. If condensation occurs, it will
disappear spontaneously while the TV is playing for a
few hours.
The condensation moisture will not harm the TV or
cause malfunction.
24.2
Screen Care
• Never touch, push, rub or strike the screen with any
object.
• Unplug the TV before cleaning.
• Clean the TV and frame with a soft damp cloth and
wipe gently. Avoid touching the Ambilight LEDs on
the backside of the TV. Never use substances such as
alcohol, chemicals or household cleaners on the TV.
• To avoid deformations and colour fading, wipe off
water drops as quickly as possible.
• Avoid stationary images as much as possible.
Stationary images are images that remain onscreen
for extended periods of time. Stationary images
include onscreen menus, black bars, time displays,
etc. If you must use stationary images, reduce screen
contrast and brightness to avoid screen damage.
166
25
Terms of Use
25.1
Terms of Use - TV
2017 © TP Vision Europe B.V. All rights reserved.
This product was brought to the market by TP Vision
Europe B.V. or one of its affiliates, hereinafter referred
to as TP Vision, which is the manufacturer of the
product. TP Vision is the warrantor in relation to the
TV with which this booklet was packaged. Philips and
the Philips Shield Emblem are registered trademarks
of Koninklijke Philips N.V.
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
Trademarks are the property of Koninklijke Philips N.V
or their respective owners. TP Vision reserves the right
to change products at any time without being obliged
to adjust earlier supplies accordingly.
The written material packaged with the TV and the
manual stored in the memory of the TV or
downloaded from the Philips
website www.philips.com/support are believed to
be adequate for the intended use of the system.
The material in this manual is believed adequate for
the intended use of the system. If the product, or its
individual modules or procedures, are used for
purposes other than those specified herein,
confirmation of their validity and suitability must be
obtained. TP Vision warrants that the material itself
does not infringe any United States patents. No
further warranty is expressed or implied. TP Vision
cannot be held responsible neither for any errors in
the content of this document nor for any problems as
a result of the content in this document. Errors
reported to Philips will be adapted and published on
the Philips support website as soon as possible.
Terms of warranty - Risk of injury, damage to TV or
void of warranty!
Never attempt to repair the TV yourself. Use the TV
and accessories only as intended by the
manufacturer. The caution sign printed on the back of
the TV indicates risk of electric shock. Never remove
the TV cover. Always contact Philips TV Customer
Care for service or repairs. Find the telephone number
in the printed documentation that came with the
TV. Or consult our
website www.philips.com/support and select your
country if needed. Any operation expressly prohibited
in this manual, or any adjustments and assembly
procedures not recommended or authorised in this
manual, shall void the warranty.
Pixel characteristics
This TV product has a high number of colour pixels.
Although it has effective pixels of 99.999% or more,
black dots or bright points of light (red, green or blue)
may appear constantly on the screen. This is a
structural property of the display (within common
industry standards) and is not a malfunction.
CE compliance
Hereby, TP Vision Europe B.V. declares that this
television is in compliance with the essential
requirements and other relevant provisions of
Directives 1999/5/EC RTTE), 2004/108/EC (EMC),
2006/95/ EC (Low Voltage), 2009/125/EC (Energy
Labelling) and 2011/65/EC (RoHS).
From June 2016 onwards the following Directives are
valid 2014/53/EU (RED), 2009/125/EC (Eco Design),
2010/30/ EU (Energy Labelling) and 2011/65/EC
(RoHS).
Compliance with EMF
TP Vision manufactures and sells many products
targeted at consumers which, like any electronic
apparatus, in general have the ability to emit and
receive electromagnetic signals. One of TP Vision’s
leading business principles is to take all necessary
health and safety measures for our products, to
comply with all applicable legal requirements and to
stay well within the Electro Magnetic Field (EMF)
standards applicable at the time of producing the
products.
TP Vision is committed to developing, producing and
marketing products that cause no adverse health
effects. TP Vision confirms that, as long as its products
are handled properly for their intended use, they are
safe to use according to scientific evidence available
today. TP Vision plays an active role in the
development of international EMF and safety
standards, enabling TP Vision to anticipate further
developments in standardisation for early integration
in its products.
25.2
Terms of Use - Smart TV
You can see the terms of use, privacy policy, and also
set privacy settings of your Smart TV.
To open the terms of use of Smart TV page…
1 - Press HOME to open the Home menu.
2 - Select Apps to open Apps.
167
26
Copyrights
26.1
MHL
MHL
MHL, Mobile High-Definition Link and the MHL Logo
are trademarks or registered trademarks of the MHL,
LLC.
26.2
Ultra HD
Ultra HD
The DIGITALEUROPE UHD Display Logo is a
trademark of DIGITALEUROPE.
26.3
HDMI
HDMI
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo are
trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC in the United States and other
countries.
26.4
Dolby Audio
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Dolby Audio, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
26.5
DTS Premium Sound ™
DTS Premium Sound ™
For DTS patents, see http://patents.dts.com.
Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing
Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol
together are registered trademarks, and DTS Premium
Sound is a trademark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All
Rights Reserved.
26.6
Wi-Fi Alliance
Wi-Fi
Wi-Fi®, the Wi-Fi CERTIFIED logo, the Wi-Fi logo are
registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
26.7
Kensington
Kensington
(If applicable)
Kensington and Micro Saver are registered US
trademarks of ACCO World Corporation with issued
168
registrations and pending applications in other
countries throughout the world.
26.8
Other Trademarks
All other registered and unregistered trademarks are
the property of their respective owners.
169
27
Disclaimer regarding
services and/or
software offered by
third parties
Services and/or software offered by third parties may
be changed, suspended, or terminated without prior
notice. TP Vision does not bear any responsibility in
these sorts of situations.
170
Index
A
Age Rating 11
Ambilight+hue, configuration 50
Ambilight+hue, Immersion 50
Ambilight+hue, on or off 50
Ambilight, Settings 49
Android Settings 34
Antenna connection 4
Antenna, Manual Installation 21
APP lock 37
Apps 35
Audio Language 12
Audio Language, Primary 12
Audio Language, Secondary 12
Auto Volume Levelling 48
Automatic Channel Update 19
B
Blu-ray Disc player, connect 26
Bluetooth, Pairing 27
Bluetooth, Remove device 27
Bluetooth, Select device 27
C
Cable, Manual Installation 21
CAM, Conditional Access Module 25
Camcorder, connect 30
Channel 10
Channel List 10
Channel List Copy 21
Channel List Copy, copy 21
Channel List Copy, current version 22
Channel List Copy, upload 22
Channel List, about 10
Channel List, filter 10
Channel List, open 10
Channel List, search 10
Channel logos 53
Channel Update Message 19
Channel, age rating 11
Channel, Antenna Installation 19
Channel, Automatic Channel Update 19
Channel, Cable Installation 19
Channel, Manual channel update 19
Channel, Options 11
Channel, Reinstall 19
Channel, switch to a channel 11
Channel, TV guide 60
Child Lock 54
Child Lock, App Lock 55
CI+ 25
Clear Dialogue 48
Clear Image Residual 47
Colour, colour control 45
Colour, Colour enhancement 44
Common Interface Slot 25
Computer, connect 30
Computer, setting 44
Connect, USB Flash Drive 30
Connectivity Guide 24
Consumer Care 164
Contact Philips 164
Contrast, Contrast Mode 45
Contrast, Perfect Contrast 46
D
Digital Text 14
Disposal of TV or batteries 159
DVB (Digital Video Broadcast) 20
DVD player 26
E
EasyLink HDMI CEC 51
Eco Settings 51
End of use 159
European Ecolabel 159
F
Frequency Scan 20
Frequency Step Size 20
G
Game Console, connect 28
Google Play Store 36
H
Hard of hearing 54
HDMI MHL 24
HDMI Ultra HD 52
HDMI, ARC 24
Headphones Volume 49
Headphones, connect 27
Home Menu 68
Home Theatre System, problems 26
Hue Bridge 50
Hue Bulbs 50
I
Internet memory, clear 33
K
Keys on TV 9
M
Media 56
Media files, from a computer or NAS 56
Media files, from a USB drive 56
MPEG Artefact Reduction 46
N
Network Frequency 20
Network Frequency Mode 20
Network Installation 32
Network, connect 32
Network, settings 33
Network, Wired 33
Network, WPS with PIN code 32
Now on TV 66
O
On and Off 9
Online support 164
Open Source software 71
Options on a Channel 11
P
171
Parental Rating 11
Partially sighted 54
Pause TV 62
Photo camera, connect 30
Photos, Videos and Music 56
Picture Style 44
Picture, picture format 47
Picture, quick settings 47
Power connection 4
Power consumption check 51
Problems, Channels 162
Problems, HDMI Connection 163
Problems, Picture 163
Problems, Remote control 162
Problems, Sound 163
Problems, USB Connection 163
Product Fiche 159
Programmes, Recommendations 66
R
Radio stations 10
Reception Quality 20
Recording 62
Recording, TV Guide data 60
Register your product 162
Reinstall TV 19
Repair 164
S
Safety Instructions 165
Screen care 166
Sharpness, MPEG Artefact Reduction 46
Smart Card, CAM 25
Software, Update 70
Sound Style 48
Sound, Auto Volume Levelling 48
Sound, Clear Dialogue 48
Sound, Headphones Volume 49
Standby 9
Subtitle 12
Subtitle Language 12
Subtitle Language, Primary 12
Subtitle Language, Secondary 12
Support, online 164
Switching On 9
T
Teletext 14
Terms of Use 167
Test Reception 20
Text 14
Text language, Primary 15
Text language, Secondary 15
Troubleshooting 162
TV Guide 60
TV Guide, data and information 60
TV Guide, Reminder 60
TV Installation 19
TV network name 33
TV on Demand 66
TV placement 4
U
Universal Access 54
USB Hard Drive, disk space 28
USB Hard Drive, Installation 28
USB Keyboard 29
USB Keyboard, connect 29
V
Video on Demand 67
Viewing distance 4
W
Watch TV 11
Wi-Fi 32
Wired Network 33
Wireless Network 32
172
Powered by TCPDF (www.tcpdf.org)
173

Navigation menu